-------
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH ft TECHNOLOGY. INC
rrr cei
-------
Appendix B
to the Final Report
Quality Assurance Program Plan
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
Prepared for the
PUERTO RICO ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY BOARD
by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH AND TECHNOLOGY
-QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM PLAN-
April, 1979
USEPA-BOA #68-02-2542
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
1.2 Project Goals
1.3 Applicable Documentation
1.4 Program Organization
2. MONITORING PROGRAM
2.1 Monitoring System Description
2.2 Project Organization
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE STANDARDS AND INSPECTIONS
4.1 Control of Purchased Material Equipment
and Services
4.2 Calibration of Measuring Equipment
4.3 Document Control
4.4 Auditing and Corrective Action
5. QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS AND REPORTING
5.1 Quality Assurance Records
5.2 Corrective Action Request Procedures
6. ACCEPTANCE
APPENDIX A TECHNICAL BULLETINS ON AIR MONITORING
INSTRUMENTATION
APPENDIX B FIELD OPERATIONS SOPs
APPENDIX C ELECTRONIC LAB SOPs
APPENDIX D SCIENTIFIC INVENTORIES AND REPORTS DIVISION SOPs
APPENDIX E AUDITS SOPs
APPENDIX F CORPORATE STATEMENT OF QUALITY ASSURANCE
POLICY AND ORGANIZATION
Page
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
2-1
2-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
4-1
4-3
4-3
4-3
5-1
5-1
5-1
6-1
iii
-------
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 Organizations and Related Areas of
Responsibility 1-3
2-1 Operational Monitoring Network 2-2
2-2 EPA Designation Numbers for Air Quality
Monitors 2-3
2-3 SOPs Governing Project Organization 2-5
2-4 Air Quality Monitoring Equipment Calibration
and Maintenance Schedule 2-6
iv
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
This Quality Assurance (QA) Program Plan describes the quality
assurance requirements applicable to the ambient air quality data
acquisition and reduction activities of the Environmental Quality Board
(EQB) for the six-site monitoring network described in this document.
It has been developed by Environmental Research and Technology, Inc.
(ERT) under the Environmental Protection Agency's (EPA) Contract
No. 68-02-2542, and is specific to the above mentioned network.
This plan covers both the data acquisition and data reduction phases
of the program. It is intended to tie together in one document all of
the QA program elements and reference documentation forming the work
system for this project. The purpose of the information contained herein
is to describe standards and procedures for installing, operating, and
maintaining the systems so that the acquired data will be collected in
a uniform manner and will be accurate. This plan also delineates the
areas of responsibility, authority, and the lines of communication between
the parties associated with this program. Once approved by EPA and ERT,
this document will become a revision controlled document and will be
delegated to EQB. All project personnel are governed by this document;
they must have access to it and demonstrate an understanding of the
portions controlling their work. The following individuals will receive
copies of this plan:
Name
Organization
John Hum
Tom Williams
Charles J. Foster
Juan Merced, Director, Air Quality Bureau
Luis Matos, Technical Advisor to the
Director, Air Quality Bureau
Israel Matos, Quality Assurance Officer
EPA
EPA
EPA
EQB
EQB
EQB
1-1
-------
1.2 Project Goals
The goal of the QA Program Plan (QA Plan) is to document the manner
in which EQB will ensure that the ambient air monitoring network will
generate a valid data base to determine local compliance with the
National Air Ambient Quality Standards (NAAQS). These data will also
be used for the management of Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD) programs.
1.3 Applicable Documentation
The program as operated by EQB will be governed by three sources of
documentation. The documents listed below form part of this QA plan and
are referenced in this document. This triad consists of Purchase Order,
State Implementation Plan (SIP), and QA Plan.
1.3.1 Environmental Protection Agency Purchase Order 68-02-2542
This document governs the technical approach and scope of the over-
all program and incorporates ERT Work Plan dated December 22, 1978.
1.3.2 Puerto Rico State Implementation Plan
This document is the basis for all of EQB's data acquisition and
quality assurance needs. It includes the Regulation for the Control of
Atmospheric Pollution and applicable Federal Regulations.
1.3.3 Quality Assurance Program Plan
This document (contained herein) describes the Quality Assurance
Program to be carried out for this network.
1.4 Program Organization
The initial implementation of the monitoring program is the
responsibility of ERT under contract to EPA and will be delegated to EQB
once the training portion of the project is completed. The areas of
responsibility are delineated and the responsible organizations are identi-
fied in Table 1-1.
1-2
-------
TABLE 1-1
ORGANIZATIONS AND RELATED AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY
ERT*
• Design and site selection of the monitoring network (Jointly with EPA).
• Site preparation.
• Installation of monitoring instrumentation.
EPA/EQB
• Design and site selection of the monitoring network.
• Purchase of monitoring instrumentation,
e Implementation of QA program.
® Data acquisition and validation.
*As per EPA contract No. 68-02-2542
-------
2. MONITORING PROGRAM
2.1 Monitoring System Description
The air quality monitoring network covered by this QA plan consists
of six ambient monitoring stations. Table 2-1 identifies each and lists
the general nature of monitoring at each station.
2.1.1 Monitoring Site Selection
The air quality monitoring sites were selected on the basis of the
following guidelines by EPA jointly with ERT:
1) Selecting Sites for Carbon Monoxide Monitoring, EPA-450/3-75-077
2) Site Selection for the Monitoring of Photochemical Air
Pollutants, EPA-450/3-78-013
3) Optimum Site Exposure Criteria for SO^ Monitoring,
EPA-450/3-78-013
4) 40 CFR 58, Appendices D and E
2.1.2 Air Quality Instrumentation Selection
The instruments were selected to meet the EPA equivalency require-
ments for air quality monitors, where applicable. The air quality
instruments selected are described in technical bulletins in Appendix A
of this plan. Table 2-2 lists the EPA equivalency test report numbers
for the aforementioned instruments.
2.2 Project Organization
This project is organized into three operational areas. Each of
these operations, as described below, will perform its activity in
accordance with the Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) applicable to
their tasks as described below. The EQB Quality Assurance Officer is
responsible for 'fine tuning' and continuously updating the SOPs described
below to the needs of the Board's monitoring activities as required by
applicable regulatory constraints.
2-1
-------
TABLE 2-1
OPERATIONAL MONITORING NETWORK
New Sites
Guyama (#15)
Existing Sites
Guaynabo (#7)
Bayamon (#19)
Catano (#5)
San Juan (#9)
Toa Baja
Parameter
SO.
SO.
so2
so2
CO
0,
Instrument
TECO 43
TECO 43
TECO 43
TECO 43
Bendix 8501CA
Dasibi 1003
Calibrator
Meloy CS-10
Meloy CS-10
Meloy CS-10
Meloy CS-10
none*
*Note: EPA Region II has authorized EQB to use the Dasibi ozone
analyzer without any external calibrator.
2-2
-------
TABLE 2-2
EPA DESIGNATION NUMBERS FOR AIR QUALITY MONITORS
Instrument
TECO 43
Bendix 8501-5CA*
Dasibi
Designation Number
EQSA-0276-009
RFCA-0276-008
EQOA-0577-019
*The Bendix CO Analyzers being currently operated by EQB are not Reference
or Equivalent method analyzers.
2-3
-------
2.2.1 Field Operations
The operational calibration, maintenance, data handling, and
initial validation in the field will be controlled by the SOPs included
in Appendix B of this document. Table 2-3 lists these SOPs. Table 2-4
summarizes the maintenance and calibration schedules.
2.2.2 Electronics Lab
The Electronics Lab SOPs cover the in-house preventive maintenance
and calibration of air quality sensors.
To minimize instrument downtime, a schedule of preventive mainte-
nance is part of this program. The preventive maintenance program
reflects the equipment manufacturer's recommendations, available field
experience, and the needs of this program.
The detailed preventive maintenance schedule, together with the
program procedure for carrying out the preventive maintenance actions,
are documented in the SOPs in Appendix C.
These actions are summarized in Table 2-4 by type of equipment.
2.2.3 Scientific Inventories and Reports Division (Data Validation)
The initial data validation is done in the field by the field
operator or technician in accordance with the criteria provided to him
in the Field Operation SOPs (Appendix B).
SOPs to be followed by Data Services in the performance of additional
data validation and data reduction are in Appendix D of this document.
The monthly data summaries will be produced under this group of
SOPs. The data will be input for the final reports.
2-4
-------
TABLE 2-3
SOP's GOVERNING PROJECT ORGANIZATION
SOP Classification
Field Operations
Electronics Lab
Scientific Inventories and Reports Division
Audits
Field Operations SOP Number
- General
EQB Field Site Routine Visit 001
Air Quality Shelter Maintenance 002
Test Equipment Calibration 004
Field Calibration of Continuous Air Quality Analyzers 003
- Thermo Electron Model 43 SO2 monitor
Routine Operation 005
Multipoint Span Check/Field Cal 006
- Bendix Model 5801-5CA CO Monitor
Routine Operation 007
Span Check/Field Cal 007
- Dasibi Model 1003PC O^ Monitor
Routine Operation 008
- Meloy CS-10 Permeation Tube SO2 Calibrator
Routine Operation 009
Electronics Lab
- Calibration of Strip Chart Recorders 010
- Test Equipment Calibration 004
- Calibration and Stability Check of TECO 43 SO- Monitor 011
- Calibration and Stability Check of Bendix 8501-5CA CO
Monitor 012
- Calibration and Stability Check of Meloy CS-10 S0_
Calibrator 013
- Calibration and Stability Check of TECO 143 S0_
Calibrator 014
Data Reduction, Processing, and Validation
- TECO 43 Data Reduction and Checking 015
- Bendix 8501 Data Reduction and Checking 016
- Dasibi Data Reduction and Checking 017
Audits
- Field Audit 018
2-5
-------
TABLE 2-4
AIR QUALITY MONITORING EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
AND CALIBRATION SCHEDULE
1.
2.
3.
Operation
TECO 43 SO2 Analyzer
Zero check
Span check
Multipoint cal.
Check capillary
Hydrocarbon cutter
Preventice Maintenance
Overhaul
Bendix 8501-5CA CO
Zero check
Span check
Multipoint cal.
Filters
Preventive Maintenance
Overhaul
Dasibi 1003PC Ozone Analyzer
Zero check (analog)
Span check (analog)
Sample and control
frequencies check
Filter
Preventive Maintenance
Overhaul
Frequency
Per site visit*
Per site visit*
Quarterly**
Per site visit*
Yearly
Semiannually
Per site visit*
Per site visit*
Quarterly**
(As required)
Semiannually
Per site visit*
Per site visit*
Weekly
Bi-weekly
As needed
4. Meloy CS-10 permeation tube calibrator
Filter change
Preventive Maintenance
Overhaul
Verification of output
As necessary
Yearly
As necessary or no
less than yearly
TECO 143 permeation tube calibrator
Filter change As necessary
Preventive Maintenance
Overhaul
Verification of output
Yearly
As necessary or no
less than yearly
Reference
SOP 005
SOP 006
SOP Oil
SOP 005
SOP 011
SOP 011
SOP 007
SOP 007
SOP 012
SOP 012
SOP 012
SOP 012
SOP 008
SOP 008
SOP 008
SOP 008
SOP 008
SOP 013
SOP 013
SOP 013
SOP 014
SOP 014
SOP 014
Notes
*Once per week minimum.
**Or more frequently as required by regulations.
2-6
-------
3l >QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION
The ERT Quality Assurance organization applicable to the EQB
monitoring network under'EPA Contract No. 68-02-2542 is contained in
the ERT "Corporate Statement of Quality Assurance Policy and Organiza-
tion" dated September 14, 1978. A copy of the document is included as<
Appendix F.
Key Quality Assurance personnel assigned to the EQB project are:
Karen Detore
Scott Whittemore
Quality Assurance Manager
Project Quality Assurance Officer
The EQB Quality Assurance organization personnel are:
Juan Merced
Director, Air Quality Bureau
Technical Assistant to the Director,
Air Quality Bureau
Quality Assurance Officer
Luis Matos
Israel Matos
3-1
-------
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE STANDARDS AND INSPECTIONS
In order to maintain consistently high quality throughout the
program, a system of quality check points has been established. As
described below, these check points occur during both the initial
(start-up) phase and the on-going (operational) phase of the project.
4.1 Control of Purchased Material, Equipment, and Services
ERT will be responsible for shelter and spare parts procurement as
detailed on the ERT work plan dated December 22, 1978.
ERT's Engineering Group will, at the time of purchase requisition
of items for which ERT is responsible, insure that QA and inspection
requirements and criteria are incorporated as part of the purchase
order. The Engineering Group determines vendor qualification through
past experience, vendor audits, in-house evaluation of new equipment,
and its ability to meet applicable specifications for the program. They
will define the need for source inspection, methods of notification, and
the specific documents to be delivered with the item. The Production
Control Group routes the material to the inspection facility or laboratory,
together with the purchase order. The inspection facility will inspect
the item in accordance with the criteria called out on the purchase
order. Once inspection verifies the material, it is released to stock.
EPA/EQB will provide all the equipment listed in Table 1-1 of the
aforementioned work plan. The equipment is expected to be in working
order and to meet all EPA equivalency requirements. ERT will conduct
factory inspection of new TECO 43 instruments as ordered by EPA
Region II prior to shipment to Puerto Rico.
4.1.1 Inspection and Verification
All air quality related material and data will be inspected and/or
verified in accordance with ERT SOPs.
For this program, the TECO 43 SO2 analyzers will be source inspected
at TECO. At that time, ERT QA personnel will verify conformance to the
purchase order by the inspection and acceptance status by vendor QA, and
4-1
-------
will verify performance by conducting acceptance tests on the equipment.
Then the traceability of the vendors' primary calibration system will
be verified. The following minimum inspection hold points have been
established for purchased equipment:
• incoming inspection on air quality instrumentation,
• incoming inspection on all data and samples,
• outgoing inspection on equipment going to the field sites, and
• independent audit of the air quality installations within
6 months of start-up, to be conducted by ERT.
All records of inspection and verification activities will be
retained in ERT files for those materials for which ERT is responsible.
4.1.2 Handling, Storage, and Shipping
ERT will ship to Puerto Rico all items described in Tables 1-2 and
1-3 of the above mentioned work plan.
ERT has developed special packing for delicate instrumentation, and
it is the responsibility of Shipping and Receiving to'assure that safe,
adequate shipping practices are followed for those items for which ERT
is responsible.
EPA/EQB will provide the necessary air conditioned storage area to
store spare instruments, supplies, and parts.
4.1.3 Nonconforming Items
For this program, nonconforming items may stem from:
• vendor hardware,
• incoming and outgoing inspection of samples and equipment, or
• field failure.
The nonconformance will be reported in inspection reports, reject
tag, or failure reports. The material will be segregated until its
disposition by the appropriate supervisor.
4-2
-------
4.2 Calibration of Measuring Equipment
Air quality analyzers will be calibrated according to the schedule
in Table 2-4 following the applicable SOPs.
Test equipment (DVMs, scopes, etc.) will be calibrated at a sub-
contractor's facility according to the provisions in S0P-004, which
appears in Appendix C.
Calibration results must be reviewed by the supervisor and approved
or rejected. The EQB QA officers will periodically inspect the completed
documentation to assure compliance with SOPs and quality control review.
4.3 Document Control
All SOPs and drawings prepared by ERT are issued as controlled
documents. That is, each original is distributed to the persons needing
it; a record is kept of the recipients, and subsequent revisions are
distributed to the original list. Complete numbered volumes of SOPs are
distributed internally.
EQB should develop similar document control procedures related to
QA proceedings. The EQB QA Officer is responsible for updating and fine
tuning of the SOPs to EQB's need as a constant ongoing QA effort.
4.4 Auditing and Corrective Action
The purpose of field audits is to provide independent verification
of instrument status and condition, and the adequacy of and compliance
with the SOPs.
EQB will perform quarterly audits for the network following the
guidelines of 40 CFR 58 Appendix A, taking into account the proposed
revisions to the regulation. These audits will be performed under ERT
supervision as stated in the contractual agreement. Appendix E has the
SOP to be followed for field audits.
The audit procedure discussed herein is applicable to both the
field operations and the analysis and reduction efforts. The audits
will be conducted using a prepared checklist by appropriately trained
personnel having no direct responsibility for the activity being audited.
4-3
-------
Audit findings will be transmitted to all concerned parties including
appropriate levels of management within 15 days of the audit by means of
a formal report. Conditions needing immediate attention will be addressed
at the time of audit. Corrective actions will be documented by using
the corrective action request (CAR) procedure outlined below or by
inclusion in the audit report. Re-audits will be performed, as necessary,
to verify implementation of corrective actions.
ERT shall also perform one independent QA audit during the three
month surveillance period. This audit will consist of the use of a
calibrator independent of the existing network.
4-4
-------
5. QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS AND REPORTING
The results of Quality Assurance inspections, calibrations, audits,
and procedures must be reported and recorded. The reporting function
serves to ensure a smooth flow of information to the concerned parties
regarding a situation which affects (or may affect) the quality of the
product. The records generated under this system provide a trail of
documentation, by which the data from any given sensor(s) may be evaluated
in terms of quality.
5.1 Quality Assurance Records
ERT maintains a series of records in order to meet the requirement
of "Records Management" in this QA program Plan and to provide evidence
of activities affecting quality. These records include results of
reviews, inspections, tests, audits, equipment tracking, monitoring of
work performance, and individual instrument calibration, and are retained
in the QA Library. Records are retained by ERT for at least three years
in the QA Library, which has supervised access.
EQB should maintain a similar QA Library documenting results of
reviews, inspections, tests, audits, monitoring of work performance, and
individual instrument calibration.
5.2 Corrective Action Request Procedures
The purpose of the Corrective Action Request (CAR) is to establish
a procedure for reporting unsatisfactory conditions and to provide a
record of corrective action. The EQB QA officer will request corrective
action in written form when he deems a discrepancy significant (potentially
repetitious, having program impact, or having the potential for unnecessary
program costs). When a CAR is initiated by someone other than the QA
officer, the request must be sent to the QA officer for purposes of
tracking and approval. This corrective action procedure will apply to
5-1
-------
both in-house EQB operations and to EQB subcontractors. In general, a
CAR will not be initiated when the discrepancy is insignificant, or when
the corrective action has already been performed. The QA officer will:
• review nonconformance reports and Quality Audit Reports to
determine that corrective action is required.
• forward a copy of the CAR to the appropriate area supervisor,
and
• file copies of CARs for follow-up and review by both the QA
officer and the Audit file.
The Area Supervisor will:
• review the CAR for concurrence with findings (if he does not
concur, the supervisor will return the CAR with his written
objections),
• take corrective action and report on that action, and
• return the CAR to the issuing QA officer within 10 days.
The QA officer will:
• review the corrective action file and follow up on the efficacy
of the corrective actions specified.
5-2
-------
6. ACCEPTANCE
This Quality Assurance Program Plan has been developed by-
Hector Diaz,"Field Supervisor, of ERT.
Revised by:
Anthony Sacco
Senior Project Engineer
Karen Detore
Quality Assurance Manager
ERT
Alberto Costales
Program Manager
ERT
Accepted by:
John Hum
EPA -
6-1
-------
6. ACCEPTANCE
This Quality Assurance Program Plan has been developed by
Hector Diaz/Field Supervisor, of ERT.
Revised by:
Anthony Sacco
Senior Project Engineer
Karen Detore
Quality Assurance Manager
ERT
Alberto Costales
Program Manager
ERT
Accepted by:
John Hum
EPA
6-1
-------
APPENDIX A
TECHNICAL BULLETINS
-------
Thermo
Electron
C O R P O RAT I O N
Environmental Instruments Division
Pulsed Fluorescent
S02 Analyzer
For Continuous
Ambient Air
Monitoring
Thermo Electron's Model 43 Pulsed
Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer provides
unequaled ease of operation, reliability,
precision and specificity. This unique,
patented, field-proven Pulsed
Fluorescence method offers significant
advantages for measuring ambient SO2
by eliminating the need for expensive
and time-consuming maintenance and
replacement of consumables.
Key Features
EPA Approved (EQSA-0276-009)*
© No consumable gases or wet
chemicals required
Longterm zero and span stability
Maintenance-free
¦, Field proven reliability
Insensitive to changes in flow and
temperature
Specific to SO2
- Linear response through all ranges
Totally self-contained
* Longterm unattended operation
"See Federal Register, Tuesday, February 18,1975,
Volume 40, Number 33. Part II for definitions and
Federal specifications.
Mode4 43 Specifications*
Farges
Noise
Lower Detectatle Limit
lnterfe«ence Eqjivalent
03
HhS
N0£
C02
CO
C2H4
H2C
NO
2erol>ift, 24hts
7 days
Span Crift, 24 hrs
7 cays
Lagtirre
Fise Time (0-95%)
Fall Time (0-95%)
FrecisiDn
Ctperat ng Temperature
Fewer 3equirenerits
Ffysical Dimensions
Weghl
Output
0-C.5, 0-1,0-5ppn
0.001 ppm
0.002 ppm
0.000 ppm
0.000 ppm
0.000 ppm
0.000 ppm
0.000 ppm
0.000 ppm
O.OOO ppm
0.005 ppm
±0.0C3ppm
±0.0C5p>pm
±1%
±2%
10 sec
2min
2min
±0.5<5>
5 to 45 "C
150 watts; 115V AC/60 Hz;
115V AC/50 Hz; 220VAC/50 Hz
17" W <83/i" Hx23r 0
55 bs
0-10Vstanda-d; also available; 0-5V,
0-1V, y- 100mV, 0-10nV, (field-selectable)
0:her outputs availan eon request (dual,4-20 ma,
1 hr, integrated valLe, etc.)
-------
Principle of Operation
As illustrated in the above diagram,
pulsed ultraviolet light passes through a
narrow bandpass filter to a measurement
chamber where it excites SO 2 molecules.
As these molecules return to the ground
state they emit a characteristic
fluorescence with intensity linearly pro-
portional to the concentration of SO2
molecules in the sample. The fluoresced
light then passes through a second filter
to illuminate the sensitive surface of a
photomultiplier tube. Electronic ampli-
fication of the output of the photo-
multiplier tube provides a meter reading
and an electronic analog signal for
recorder output.
Options
43-001 19" Rack-mountable
configuration
43-002 External activation of zero/span
solenoids
»/— Thermo
f/C. Electron
C O R P a RATI O N
Environmental Instruments Division
108 South Street
Hopkinton, MA 01748 Printed in U.-S A
(617)435-5321 ism-bai-m
®§»i Ipr^ss
POWER
SUPPLY
VACUUM
GAUGE
FLOW-
METER
PHOTO-
MULTIPLIER
PERMEATION
DRYER
CUTTER
FLUORESCENT
CHAMBER
CAPILLARY
VACUUM
REGULATOR
EXHAUST
-------
Bendix Model 8501-5CA CO Analyzer
PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
The minimum performance parameters for the Infrared Gas Analyzer are presented below. The
instrument will operate within these state performance parameters under the conditions listed.
a. Ranges: 0-50, 250, 500 and 1000 PPM CO full scale*
b. Minimum Detectable Sensitivity: 0.5 PPM
c. Electronic Response Time: 0.7 second to 90% of full scale
d. Time Constant: Continuously adjustable 0.7 to 16 seconds
e. Zero Drift: 0.5% per hour or ±1% for 24 hours whichever is lower,
±2% of full scale for 3 days
f. Span Drift: ±1% for 24 hours, ±2% of full scale for 3 days
g. Precision: 1% of full scale
h. Noise: ±0.5% of full scale (max.) with 5 second time constant
i. Linearity: ±0.5% of full scale on 50 PPM range
±1% of full scale on 250, 500 and 1000PPM range
j. Interference Equivalent: C02 rejection ratio 40,000 to 1
Water vapor rejection ratio 20,000 to 1
Less than 1 PPM
k. Outputs: 0-10 mV, 0-100 mV, 0-1 V, and 0-10 Volts
I. Power Requirements: 105 to 125 Volts, 50 or 60 Hz, 300 W (Approx.)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
a. Overall dimensions: 30" (76 cm) high, 19" (48 cm) wide, and 11" (27 cm) deep
b. Weight: Approximately 60 pounds (27.22 kg.)
•Other optional higher ranges are available and will not effect the 0-50 ppm range
perfromance. Because the ranges are selected by four resistive feedback networks,
changing the resistance value for the three upper ranges will have no effect on the
lower range.
-------
Dasibi Model 1003PC Ozone Monitor
SPECIFICATIONS
RANGE
INCREMENTAL SENSITIVITY
ACCURACY
PRECISION (REPEATABILITY)
ZERO DRIFT
DIGITAL AND BCD OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
SPAN DRIFT
DIGITAL AND BCD OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
INTERVAL (INFORMATION UPDATE)
FLOW RATE
RISE TIME 90%
FALL TIME 90%
LINEARITY - FROM 0.000 to
1.000 PPM
TEMPERATURE RANGE
POWER
¦0.000 to 0.500 or 1.000 PPM**
0.001 PPM
3% (Based on Beer's Law)
+1% OR 1 DIGIT, WHICHEVER IS GREATER
LESS THAN 0.1%/DAY
LESS THAN 0.5%/tlAY &
+ l%/3 DAYS
& + l%/3 DAYS
LESS THAN 0.1%/lDAY
LESS THAN 0.5%/DAY
24 SECONDS**
2 Lit/Win NOMINAL
25 SECONDS MAXIMUM
25 SECONDS MAXIMUM
1%
0*C TO 50*C (32"F TO 122*F)
110V, 50 TO 400 Hz, 110 WAITS AVE.
(220V AVAILABLE)
OUTPUT
DIGITAL DISPLAY
ANALOG
BCD (OPTION)
0 LEVEL
1 I£VEL
DATA-READY PULSE
0.000 TO 1.000 PPM
1 irfV per .001 PPM (SID)
ADJUSTABLE TO 0.1 mV per .001 PPM***
8-4-2-1, STANDARD TTL
BUFFERED OUTPUT
0.4V MAXIMUM
2.4V MINIMUM
150 ms
CABINET
BENCH MOUNT
19 INCH RACK MOUNT
WIDTH
HEIGHT
DEPTH
WEIGHT (INSTRUMENT)
(TOTAL SHIPPING)
38 cm (15 INCHES)
13 an (5 1/4 IN.)
56 an (22 INCHES)
14 Kg (31 IBS)
16 Kg (35 IBS)
48 an (19 INCHES)
13 an (5 1/4 IN.)
56 an (22 INCHES)
14 Kg (31 IBS)
16 Kg (35 IBS)
* 0 TO 20 PPM AND OTHER RANGES TO 10% OZCNE BY WEIGHT AVAILABLE
** OTHER CYCLE TIMES FRCM 10 SECONDS AVAILABIE
*** .01 XrtV PER .001 PEM AND 10 mV PER .001 PPM ALSO AVAILABLE. STATE
RANGE WHEN ORDERING
~ The instrument does not have a range switch but reads continuously from
.001 PPM to 1 PPM. It meets the EPA Designated range requirements for
0.5 and 1.0 PPM.
-------
Meloy Model CS-10 Permeation Tube SC^ Calibrator
Specifications:
Range:
Calibration:
Accuracy:
Ambient Temperature Range:
Tube Life:
Flow Control:
Air Bath Temperature Variation:
Temperature Control:
Airflow Readings:
Size:
Weight:
Power:
Factory calibrated for
selectable setting of any
SO2 concentration level
between 0.1 and 0.8 ppm.
±2% of NBS Certified Standard
±2% of Calibration Curve
10°C to 40°C
Approximately six months of
continuous operation
±2%
(a) ±0.01°C at any setting
Precise electronic temperature
controls with visible front
panel function indicator
Front panel 150 mm flow
meter with stainless steel
glass floats
14" x 12" x 12"
26 lbs.
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 60 Watts
-------
APPENDIX B
FIELD OPERATIONS SOPs
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 001
Revision: 0
EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 1 of 5
Standard Operating Procedure Date:
Title: EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT Number: 001
Revision: o
EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT
1.0 Purpose and Philosophy
1.1 This procedure describes the basic routine for field technician
visits to EQB monitoring sites. The principal objectives of each
visit are to:
• Assess the status of each monitoring system.
• Evaluate the quality; that is, the validity, of data gathered.
• Perform maintenance tasks as scheduled or indicated.
• ' Document all significant information for use in historical
analysis.
1.2 The first assessment of data validity is performed by the field
technician. The field technician, being at the point of measurement
and having first-hand knowledge of instrument status and performance,
is able to identify data which are not valid or suspect. Guidelines
for making these judgments, and documentation for historical verifi-
cation, are described in this procedure.
1.3 It is a goal of this procedure to eliminate the recording of data not
essential to the data validation or instrument maintenance processes.
1.4 This SOP does not describe detailed corrective actions for abnormal
conditions. These instructions are provided in the instrument-
specific SOPs and the instrument manuals.
2.0 Responsibilities
2.1 The EQB field technician assigned to each network is responsible
for performance in accordance with this procedure, and for the
completion and submission of the indicated documents.
2.2 The district supervisor is responsible for monitoring the field
technician's performance by this SOP, for parallel review of the
documentation submitted, and for response to the field technician's
request for assistance.
2.3 The Air Quality Data Handling Division department and team supervisors
are responsible for feedback of information to Field Operations
concerning errors or improvements in the field data submitted.
3.0 Methods
3.1 This SOP addresses the EQB 6 station monitoring network developed by
ERT under EPA Contract No. 68-02-2542, where there are Teco SO2
Bendix CO, and Dasibi 0^ monitoring instruments and where the
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 2 of 5
Standard Operating Procedure n,
Date: 3/1/79
Title: EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT Number: 001
Revision: 0
frequency of site visits is dictated by the QA Program Plan and appli-
cable SOPs. For specific site use, only applicable portions of the
status/data assessment sheets should be used.
3.2 Data and Document Submissions
3.2.1 Strip chart records and one copy of each of the weekly forms -
the status/data assessment sheets and the field station log - are
submitted each week to the Scientific Inventories and Reports
Division.
3.2.2 The original of each of the weekly forms is retained at the site.
3.2.3 One copy of each of the weekly forms is submitted to the district
office.
3.3 Data Validity and Instrument Status
3.3.1 One of the functions required of the field technician is to
provide an assessment of data validity for data collected from
sites under his jurisdiction. A series of criteria has been
developed to define validity and provide the necessary documen-
tation to prove data validity. The EQB Status/Data Assessment
sheets, EQB forms 001-A, 001-B, and 001-C, provide guides for this
assessment and a medium for documentation. Sample forms are
attached.
3.3.2 Status/Data Assessment sheets are to be filled out at least once
each week. Spaces are provided for a check-off procedure of up to
four times each week. It is necessary only to fill in the
remaining items on the final day of the week being reported.
Additional days may be desirable, but are not mandatory.
3.3.3 The check-off procedure requires the entering of a check (/),
indicating YES, or a NO for each item. The entering of a NO
often indicates that on-site corrective action or notification of
district personnel for corrective action assistance is required.
The appropriate action should be taken and stated in the field
station log.
3.3.4 Spaces are provided on the sheets for identifying data as valid,
suspect, or invalid. The field technician is required to classify
all data obtained during the week, by date and time, based on the
criteria listed and THE BEST JUDGMENT OF THE FIELD TECHNICIAN.
3.3.5 Certain checks are common to most of the parameters and are
defined as follows:
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT
Page
of
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 001
Revision: 0
3.3.5.1 "Strip chart time, supply, marked?"
a) Is the indicated strip chart time accurate? If the chart
requires adjustment to match the time, the chart should
be clearly marked before and after adjustment.
b) Is the chart supply adequate until the next visit?
c) Are the date and time of visit clearly marked on the
chart ?
3.3.5.2 "Is ENTIRE prior strip chart OK?" The field technician is to
examine the portion of the strip chart generated since the
last examination for normal and anomalous data.
3.3.5.3 Serial Numbers. Indicate instrument serial numbers in the
left hand margin for each air quality sensor.
3.3.6 Status/Data Assessment Sheet Items
3.3.6.1 Shelter Status:
a) "Temp. (67-78°F)?" - check the current temperature.
Where high-low thermometers are installed, check the
high and low since the last visit; reset the high and
low markers.
b) "Manifold pump OK?" - verify that the pump is operating;
visually inspect all connections.
3.3.6.2 Calibrator Status
Refer to SOPs 006 and 009.
3.3.6.3 Teco SO2
Refer to SOPs 005 and 006.
3.3.6.4 Bendix CO
Refer to SOP 007.
3.3.6.5 DASIBI 03
Refer to SOP 008.
3.3.6.6 Normal Conditions
Indicate any local conditions (here or on the field station
log) which might explain abnormal, but not necessarily
invalid, data. Conditions worth noting would include
precipitation, wind and dust storms, construction, traffic,
harvesting, or obvious sources which might increase
pollutant concentrations.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 4 of 5
Standard Operating Procedure ^ 7, ,,Q
Date: 3/1/79
Title: EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT Number: 001
Revision: 0
3.3.7 Data Validation
ALL DATA COLLECTED THAT MEET THE ABOVE DATA CRITERIA SHOULD BE
CONSIDERED VALID DATA. If any data falls within the "suspect" or
"invalid" categories, reasons for the nonvalid categories should be
specified on the status/data sheet or associated log sheet. These
same periods of suspect or invalid data should also be clearly
marked on the strip chart. Actions taken to correct cause of
nonvalid data should be specified in the field station log.
3.4 Preventive maintenance
A series of weekly preventive maintenance activities and measurements
are also listed in the applicable SOP. The items listed are self-
explanatory, and details on how.such measurements and cleanings should
be performed are contained in the individual instrument manuals.
3.5 Field Station Log
This log will be used to record all occurrences at the station which
may be of significance in later analysis of the data or in the operational
and maintenance history of any of the installed instruments or equipment
and test equipment. Included are the following items:
3.5.1 Changes and calibrations of all equipment and serial numbers of
each piece of equipment.
3.5.2 A description of any NO entries on the Status/Data Assessment
Sheet, and action taken, if any.
3.5.3 A description of abnormal conditions, as discussed in 3.3.6.6.
3.5.4 A description of "suspect" or "invalid" data, as discussed in
3.3.7 and 3.3.4.
3.6 Guidelines for Documentation
3.6.1 The purposes of the status/data assessment sheet, the field station
log and chart markings are:
a. To mark clearly data judged as valid, suspect, or invalid.
b. For invalid data, to state clearly why the data is invalid.
c. For suspect data, to provide all information which will aid
in the evaluation of data validity.
d. For all operations, to provide all information which may be
helpful or necessary in analyzing air quality conditions,
instrument performance, and site activities.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 5 of 5
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: EQB FIELD SITE ROUTINE VISIT Number: 001
Revision: 0
3.6.2 These documents are official program records, and may be used in
subsequent legal proceedings.
3.6.3 Entries should be simple and clear. Field technicians should note
that an analyst, meteorologist, shop repairperson, or source
operator may need to use the information weeks or months later.
Be as precise as possible. For example, do not say "sensor" down
if it is the recorder and not the sensor that is down. Another
example; differentiate between "timer" and "elapsed time meter."
3.6.4 Entries on the right side of the status/data assessment sheet
should be limited to the following:
a. Classification of data as valid, suspect, or invalid.
b. If more than one classification for the week, the start and
end data and time for each classification.
c. Short entries of why data is suspect or invalid. (Details
should be in the field station log.)
d. Short entries explaining NO's; for example, where a reading
is out of tolerance, indicate the reading. (Again* details of
why or subsequent action should be in the field station log.)
3.6.5 Documentation should be consistent in that the chart, the status/
data assessment sheet, and the field station log all cover the
same one week period, usually 0001 Monday to 2400 Sunday. It is
understood that entries describing data prior to 2400 Sunday will
usually be made and dated on the following Monday or Tuesday.
Nonetheless, all sheets describing the data week for charts should
be packaged with the charts.
4.0 Quality Assurance Audit
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of this pro-
cedure and corrective actions will be taken as required.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET 001A
TECO MODEL 43 SC>2
SOP 001
NETWORK:
STATION:
STATION NO.:
OPERATOR:
WEEK ENDING:
DATE:
DATA
Valid Suspect Invali^
LOCAL STANDARD TIME:
/ or NO*
SHELTER STATUS:
Temp. = 67° - 78°F?
Manifold Pump OK?
Calibration Controller OK?
CALIBRATOR:
Temp. = Des. ±0.1 °C
TECO 43 STATUS:
Flow Rate = 2 to 4 SCFH?
Pressure at 10 ± 0.1" Hg?
Strip Chart Time, Supply
Marked?
TECO 43 DATA:
All Prior BLs 0 ppm
± 0.005 ppm (0.10V)
All prior Spans ±15%
of Desig.
Entire prior chart OK?
MANUAL CALIBRATION: DATE
Zero = 0 ± 0.005 ppm (0.10V)?
Calibrator Flow ± .5 mm of Des.?
Teco output ±15% of Des.?
WEEKLY CHECKS:
Cooling fan working? Pump OK? Capillaries clean? UV lamp working?
PC Board: FS = 10 ± 0.01 Volts?
Output Board: FS = 10 ± 0.01 V?
BI-WEEKLY: Particulate filter changed?
^Explanations of all NO entries should appear in the field station log.
EQB Form 001-A
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET
BENDIX 8501-5CA-C0 ANALYZER
NETWORK
STATION
STATION NUMBER
OPERATOR
WEEK ENDING
DATE
LOCAL STANDARD TIME
/ or NO*
DATA
VALID SUSPECT INVALID
(Show date and time for each
category)
SHELTER STATUS: Temp. (67-78°F)
Manifold Pump OK?
BENDIX CO STATUS: S/N
Strip Chart time, supply
marked?
Sample flow = 3.00 ± 1 cm?
Cal. Gases > 300 psi?
DATA: Strip chart?
All prior Os 8-12%?
All prior spans ±5% of Des.?
If not, is recal. OK?
Entire prior chart OK?
NORMAL CONDITIONS?
WEEKLY CHECKS
BENDIX CO
Back pressure ± 1 psi of Des.?
Sample filter clean? Gas filter clean?
Manifold connections tight? Vent lines unobstructed?_
Unfiltered noise < 0.2V?
CALIBRATION:
Initial: Zero ppm Span ppm
Final: Zero = 0 ± 1 ppm? Span = Des. ppm ± 5%?
Zero Pot. Prev./Current / Span Pot. Prev./Current /
*Explanation of all NO entries should appear in field station log.
EOB Form 001-B
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET
DASIBI MODEL 1003 03 MONITOR
Form 001-C
NETWORK: STATION: STATION NO. :
OPERATOR: WEEK ENDING:
DATA
Valid Suspect Invalid
/ or NO*
SHELTER STATUS:
Temp. = 67° - 78°F?
Manifold Pump OK?
DASIBI DAILY CHECKS:
Sample Flow 2 &/min
Span No. - 54.950
Control Frequency between
23.0 and 28.0
Sample Frequency between
35.0 and 48.0
Zero Offset Pot
Zero Check
Lines Connected Properly
DASIBI MONTHLY CHECKS
Mother Board Voltages
+5VDC ± 0.25V
±15VDC ± 0.75V
±24VDC ± 1.2V
±200VDC ± 20V
Cycle Time between
20 and 30 sec
Temperature Control Voltage
Analog Zero
Span = 54.950
Sample Frequency between
35.0 and 48.0
Control Frequency between
23.0 and 28.0
Determine Zero Offset
System Leak Check
Solenoid Valve Leak Check
Scrubber Efficiency >96%
Replace Particulate Filter
DATE:
LOCAL STANDARD TIME:
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date;
Title: Number: 002
Revision: 0
EQB Air Quality Shelter Maintenance
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH 5 TECHNOLOGY, INC.
For the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1 of ^
Standard Operating Procedure Date:
Title: Air Quality Shelter Maintenance Number: 002
Revision: 0
1.0 PURPOSE
1.1 This procedure is intended to provide a basic method for proper
inspection and maintenance of air quality shelters in the field.
2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
2.1 The. EQB field technician is responsible for carrying out the shelter
maintenance and for ensuring that it is accomplished in accordance
with this procedure.
3.0 EXTERIOR DAILY (or each site visit)
3.1 General inspection for damage to fencing, posts or pipe courses and
ground wires. Note in log any occurrences of damage and notify
supervisor.
3.2 Shelter - Visual inspection for damage to shelter walls, ladders,
stairs, and safety rails, etc. (rock throwing damage, shotgun blast,
bullet holes, and peeling paint, etc). Note in log any occurrences
and notify supervisor. Make temporary repair if warranted. Note
condition of sampling funnel and screen on air sampling tube.
3.3 Grounds - visual inspection. Remove debris. Gravel properly distributed.
Note condition of grass.
4.0 EXTERIOR WEEKLY
4.1 Fencing - See paragraph 3.1 above.
4.2 Shelter - See paragraph 3.2 above.
4.3 Grounds - Grass around shelters, inside the fence and within two
feet of the outside of the fence area should be cut at least once
a week.
4.4 Exterior - Six Months
4.4.1 Scrape off any flaking paint and wire brush bare spots. Touch
up with an epoxy base outside enamel paint. (Suggest
Rustoleum, 4 in 1 brand or equal). Recaulk cracked caulking.
4.5 Exterior - Yearly
4.5.1 Shelters that have had extensive patch work on touch up
should be completely repainted after a wash down with
detergent and water.
5.0 INTERIOR
5.1 Interior - Daily
5.1.1 Perform visual inspection of the air conditioner, thermostat,
and shelter temperature for proper operation. The correct
shelter temperature should be: 67° - 78°F for Air Quality
Shelters.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 2 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure n, ,...
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Air Quality Shelter Maintenance Number: 002
Revision: 0
5.1.2 Perforin a visual check of the air sampling manifold system.
Verify that all sample connections are secure and that the
manifold fan is operating.
5.1.3 Deposit all useless papers and containers in trash basket.
5.2 Interior - Weekly
5.2.1 Empty trash containers,
5.2.2 Sweep shelter floors and spot-clean floors where necessary.
5.3 Interior - Monthly
5.3.1 Check and tighten if necessary all sample line connections.
5.3.2 Dust tables, racks, and ledges.
5.3.3 Wash floors with a light detergent solution. Use steel wool for
removal of scuff marks.
5.3.4 Wax floors with a suitable liquid self-polishing wax.
5.4 Interior - Six months preventative maintenance procedure for Air
Sampling Manifolds.
5.4.1 a) Before starting note on strip chart time, day, parameter,
and site ID.
b) Remove sample line from rear of analyzer (this will
eliminate any foreign matter entering unit).
c) Tubing - 1/4" from sample port to manifold. Remove from
manifold and check that line is clear. -1/4" to 1/8"
from sample port to manifold. Disconnect 1/8" completely
(some cases will involve removing heat shrink tubing).
This must be done in order to insure sample line
remains clear and then remove 1/4" line from manifold.
d) After all sample lines are removed, disconnect and remove
glass manifold assembly (Note: In some cases removal
does not apply; manifold should be cleaned in place).
See sheet 3. Using a plastic dishpan, mix a solution
of water and a small amount of mild, nonarranonia
detergent (a laboratory glass cleaner like Calgonite
is suggested). Wash thoroughly and rinse with clear
water and let dry. Reverse procedure steps d-a for
reinstallation.
e) Upon completion of procedure ensure that all analyzers
are sampling from manifold, mark strip charts accordingly.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 3 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure Date;
Title: Air Quality Shelter Maintenance Number: 002
Revision: 0
5.4.2 Check sample tube intake section ahead of manifold for
stoppages and clean with brush assembly or other equipment
provided for that purpose. For sectional glass sample line
assemblies see Paragraph 6.0.
5.4.3 Replace teflon span, sample, and hydrogen lines.
6.0 PROCEDURE FOR CLEANING NONREMOVABLE MANIFOLD - SECTIONAL GLASS TYPE
6.1 When removal of manifold is not possible, i.e., when manifold is
completely fabricated from glass, the following steps should be used
after completing steps a-d.
Materials required: 25' nylon line 1/16" diameter
Round soft bristle brush 3" diameter
Squeeze bottle 1 pt. or larger
6.2 Shut down sample vacuum pump and remove from bottom of manifold.
6.3 Set dishpan containing cleaning solution beneath manifold.
6.4 From the topside end of the manifold feed nylon line into interior,
attach soft bristle brush to this line plus another line from inside
shelter.
6.5 Position one man on roof and work brush up/down several times using
solution. Remove brush. Topside man squirt clear water to rinse.
Let assembly dry a few minutes. Reconnect sample vacuum pump and let
run 10-15 minutes before inserting sample lines.
7.0 The divisional QA officer shall conduct audits of this procedure. Corrective
action will be taken as required.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: Number: 003
Revision: 0
EQB FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH § TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/781
-------
Page 1 of
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
1.0 Purpose and Applicability
1.1 The purpose of this SOP is to assure that the output of the field
measurement process conforms to accurate standards and is traceable to
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standard Reference Material (SRM) or
equivalent.
1.2 This procedure applies to field calibration of any continuous air
quality analyzers.
2.0 Definitions
Accuracy - The extent to which a measurement or the average of numerous
measurements recorded by a single analyzer agree with the true value. The
difference between the true value and the measured value is defined as the
error. An analyzer is considered accurate if the error is less than the
tolerance or control limits.
Assignable Cause - A cause which can be found and corrected.
Audit - An independent review conducted to compare some aspect of performance
with a standard for that performance. A performance audit of a continuous
gas analyzer incorporates a calibration check utilizing multiple known
inputs; however, it is not a multipoint calibration.
Audit Calibrator - A device other than the in-station calibrator or the
reference calibrator which is used only for audits. The audit calibrator
must be an EPA-approved transfer standard, in current calibration,
capable of producing gases at several concentrations equally spaced over
the operating range of the analyzer to be audited. These "test atmospheres"
must be traceable to a primary standard.
Calibration - The process of establishing the relationship between the
output of a measurement process, and that of a known input.
Calibration Check - The process of determining the relationship between the
output of a measurement process and that of a known input in order to
ascertain the extent to which it agrees with the desired relationship.
Calibrator - A device used to generate a known input or range of known
inputs.
Control Limit - A value calculated from a sample of test data, and expressed
as a hypothetical test value, which defines a limit of random cause in the
variation of the test data. Control limits are most often a pair of values
defining limits of upward and downward variation.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS
Example: If the designated automatic span value for a given analyzer-
calibrator pair is 80 ppb and the calculations indicate that variations of
±10 ppb or less are attributable to random cause, then the control limits
for these spans are:
Upper - 90 ppb
Lower - 70 ppb
Variations outside control limits are attributable to assignable cause.
As used in this document, "control" and "tolerance" are nearly identical
in meaning.
Data Processing Center - The location and group where data for a network are
processed.
In-Station Calibrator - A calibrator integrated with a continuous monitor in
a field monitoring site.
Multipoint Calibration - A calibration utilizing 1) multiple known inputs
for the initial calibration check to determine linearity and accuracy of
response, 2) adjustment or readjustment, if required, based upon the tolerance
or control limits, 3) a final calibration check to confirm linearity and
accuracy of response following adjustment or readjustment, and 4) at least
3 points and zero.
Precision - The extent to which any individual value in a set of controlled
test data can be expected to agree with the average of the set. The variability
of data. Precision is not a measurement to determine "how far" from the
true value (accuracy) but rather how scattered are the measurements.
Primary Standard - A method, device, or material having known, stable,
measurable, and readily reproducible characteristics.
Random Cause - A cause which cannot be isolated and/or attributed to a
correctable condition.
Reference Calibrator - A device other than the in-station calibrator, which
is used to calibrate or check an analyzer in the field. A reference cali-
brator must be in current calibration and capable of producing concentrations
over the range of the analyzer to be calibrated or checked. This calibrator
should be traceable to a primary standard.
Span Check - An input generated by a calibrator, usually an in-station
calibrator, to verify analyzer performance. A span check is used to indicate
changes in system performance and to demonstrate whether or not the instrument
is performing within tolerance or control limits. Span checks may also be
used to assess data for precision.
Standard Reference Material - A material (such as bottled gas or permeation
tube) which has been certified as a primary standard.
Page ^ of 11
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 003
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Page ^ of H
Date: 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
Tolerance Limit - A noncalculated limit of variation set by contract,
regulatory agency, or by judgement based upon experience (e.g., a known
input ± some percentage).
Traceability - Refers to written documentation supporting the accuracy,
relative to a primary standard, of a method, device or material, and the
data it produces. Documentation must trace the history of calibrations,
including dates and methods and procedures used, back to the relevant primary
standard (by number, if NBS-SRM).
Transfer Standard (Secondary Standard) - A method, device, or material which
is calibrated against a primary standard for comparison with a third method,
device, or material.
3.0 Responsibilities
3.1 Field Technician shall:
• Be aware of and report to his supervisor circumstances that
require calibration (see 5.2 and 5.3); and
• Perform field calibrations and calibration checks in accordance
with this SOP and Quality Assurance Plan.
3.2 District Supervisor shall:
• Ensure the availability of proper calibration equipment and the
prompt calibration of all analyzers requiring calibration;
• Review all calibration data to detect any circumstances, actions,
or lack of actions that are at variance with this SOP and
supporting SOPs, or that may have resulted in an unacceptable
calibration; and to accept or reject the data based upon his
findings; and
• Ensure that all rejected calibrations are redone promptly, and
forward accepted calibration documentation to the appropriate
parties (Section 5.9).
4.0 Policy
4.1 Calibrators
4.1.1 A Span Check may be performed using the following:
- In-station calibrator
- Reference calibrator
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 4 of 11
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
4.1.2 A multipoint Calibration Check may be performed using the
following if the range of outputs is adequate.
- In-station calibrator
- Reference calibrator
4.1.3 A Calibration may be performed only with:
- Reference calibrator
- In-station calibrator, only if it has been verified
against an independent transfer standard within
the past three (3) months.
4.1.4 An audit may be performed only with an audit calibrator.
4.2 ERT has determined that a single-point calibration is inadequate for
the proper adjustment of continuous analyzers. Thus all calibrations
of continuous analyzers shall be multipoint calibrations.
4.3 Zero and Span Checks
4.3.1 Check the calibration sticker on the calibrator. If the
calibrator is overdue for reverification, this situation
should be reported in the logs and arrangements should be
made for prompt reverification of the unit.
4.3.2 Zero checks should be performed prior to and immediately
after any manual span or calibration checks.
4.3.2.1 If the analyzer response to zero air is within the
tolerance limits defined in the appropriate analyzer-
specific SOP, proceed with a span check.
4.3.2.2 If analyzer response is not within tolerance limits,
trouble shoot to determine an assignable cause for the
difference before adjusting. Possible sources of zero
air contamination (filters and/or scrubbers) should be
checked before analyzer zero is adjusted. When the
zero response is within the tolerance limits defined in
the appropriate SOP, proceed with the span check.
4.3.3 For sites where span checks are performed automatically
once per day:
4.3.3.1 Permeation chamber temperature in permeation tube
devices should be checked periodically as specified
in the appropriate SOP.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 5 of 11
Standard Operating Procedure n,
Date: 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
4.3.3.2 The flow should be checked periodically and maintained
at its current designated value.
4.3.3.3 Automatic span checks should be augmented by at
least one manual span check every two weeks. If a
systematic difference arises between automatic and
manual span checks, efforts should be made immediately
to determine the cause of the difference. If the cause
cannot be isolated at the time the discrepancy is first
noticed, the frequency of manual span checks should be
doubled and efforts should be made to determine an
assignable cause for the difference over a period of
time. Once the cause is found and corrected, the original
frequency of manual span checks may be resumed.
4.3.3.4 A manual span check should be performed whenever one or
more automatic spans fall outside tolerance or control
limits as defined in the appropriate SOP. If manual
span checks show similar deviation, a calibration check
should be performed.
4.3.4 For sites without in-station calibrator for daily automatic
span checks:
4.3.4.1 Manual span checks should be performed at least once
per week.
4.3.4.2 If an in-station calibrator is being used, the permeation
chamber temperature (for permeation tube devices) and
flow setting should be checked before beginning the
span check.
4.3.4.3 If a portable calibrator is being used, ensure, before
performing a span check, that adequate preparation of the
calibrator has been accomplished with respect to:
• proper temperature environment,
• sufficient warm-up,
• proper chamber temperature (in permeation tube devices),
• current calibration sticker,
• complete documentation, and
• preventative maintainence (leak check) as detailed
in the appropriate SOP.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 6 of 11
Standard Operating Procedure Date;
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
4.3.5 The manual span checks should be entered in the field station
log with calibrator serial number, flow setting(s), permeation
chamber temperature, input concentration, and analyzer response.
The strip chart should be artnotated with calibrator serial
number and input concentration.
4.4 A Calibration Check is required according to the following:
4.4.1 Upon installation of an analyzer in a field station.
4.4.2 After repair of a malfunctioning analyzer.
4.4.3 After replacement of major components of an analyzer (see
analyzer-specific SOP).
4.4.4 Prior to removal of an analyzer from a field station, if
it is still functioning.
4.4.5 When a span check tolerance limit or control limit (which-
ever is being used) is exceeded in two or more consecutive
manual spans (assuming automatic spans are within limits),
or when both manual and automatic spans show out of spec
response.
4.4.6 Following the adjustment or readjustment (multipoint cali-
bration) of the analyzer.
4.4.7 At a maximum interval of three (3) months (a performance
audit can be used to meet this requirement - e.g., PSD
requires audits quarterly on all analyzers).
4.4.8 When directed by an appropriate supervisor.
4.5 Before beginning a calibration check, all users of this procedure
shall:
4.5.1 Ensure that adequate preparation of the calibrator has been
accomplished with respect to:
proper temperature environment,
sufficient warm-up,
proper chamber temperature in permeation tube devices,
current calibration sticker,
complete documentation, and
preventative maintenance (leak check).
(The above are detailed in the calibrator-specific SOP).
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page ^ of H
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
4.5.2 If it is a start-up calibration check, the user shall be
certain that adequate preparation of the analyzer has been
accomplished with respect tp:
• proper temperature environment,
• sufficient warm-up,
• initial measurements, and
• preventive maintenance (leak check).
(The above are detailed in the analyzer-specific calibration
SOP).
4.5.3 Ensure that the analyzer response to zero air is within the
tolerance limits defined in the appropriate SOP (See 4.2.2).
4.6 ERT has established tolerance limits for accuracy.
4.6.1 The maximum allowable deviation of analyzer response from
input concentration is ±10%.
4.6.1.1 When analyzer responses to calibration gas in a cali-
bration check fall outside this limit, the analyzer must
be recalibrated or replaced.
4.6.2 The minimum adjustable deviation is ±5%.
4.6.2.1 When analyzer responses during a calibration check fall
within this limit, the analyzer should not be adjusted.
4.6.3 When the deviation is greater than 5% but less than 10%,
adjustment is optional.
4.6.4 The deviation of analyzer output from input concentration is
determined by the following calculations.
4.6.4.1 Calculating the % difference at each concentration by
the following formula:
(Concentration) _ . (concentration). ^
% difference = 'output - \ ^ut x 100
(concentration)^npU^
4.6.4.2 Averaging the % difference for all of the concentrations.
Note: It is essential that correct signs (+ or -) be
retained during calculation of average % difference.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page ^ of 11
Standard Operating Procedure Date; 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
4.6.4.3 Compare the % difference at each point with the average
% difference. If the % difference at any individual
point differs from the.average % difference by more than
5%, run the point again. If, on this second run, the
point falls within 5% of the average, accept it and
recompute the average. If not, trouble shoot to determine
an assignable cause for the difference. There may be
problems in the analyzer or calibrator or the system as
a whole that require repair.
4.7 Multipoint Calibration is required after a calibration check only if the
following conditions are met.
4.7.1 The analyzer response (average % difference) in the cali-
bration check is ±10%.
4.7.2 An assignable cause is identified and corrected.
4.7.3 An assignable cause has not been identified after all avenues
for determination have been exhausted, and in the best judgement
of the user of this procedure, calibration is the appropriate
course of action for continuing operations. In this case the
field logs, strip charts, and calibration document will be
"flagged" for supervisory and/or engineering review.
4.8 Before beginning a multipoint calibration, all users of this procedure
shall perform the following.
4.8.1 Attempt to determine an assignable cause for any deviation
outside tolerance or control limits, and correct, if possible.
4.8.2 Ensure that adequate preparation of the analyzer has been
accomplished with respect to
• proper temperature environment,
• sufficient warni-up,
• initial measurements, and
• preventive maintenance (leak check).
(The above are detailed in the analyzer-specific
calibration SOP).
4.8.3 Ensure that analyzer response to zero air is within the
tolerance limits defined in the appropriate SOP (see 4.2.2).
4.9 In-station calibrator verification
4.9.1 Whenever a calibration check is performed, the performance of
the in-station calibrator shall be verified.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 9 of 11
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS Number: 003
Revision: 0
4.9.2 In-station calibrators are calibrated through the use of
NBS-traceable flow and temperature devices and gas sources.
In-station calibrators cannot be recalibrated in the field by
transfer from a calibrated analyzer.
4.9.3 An in-station calibrator may be verified by direct comparison
to the reference calibrator being used to perform the calibration
check by the following procedure:
4.9.3.1 Generate identical concentrations (at or near 25% of
in-station calibrator range) with the in-station calibrator
and the reference calibrator and input this concentration
to the analyzer alternately with each of the two devices.
Allow sufficient time for the analyzer to produce a
stable reading for each input.
4.9.3.2 Calculate the % difference between the analyzer response
to the same concentration from the two different cali-
brators by the following formula.
% Difference =
(Analyzer Output). . -(Analyzer Output) .
in-staxion r6t•
(Analyzer Output) re^.
x 100
4.9.3.3 Repeat steps 4.9.3.1 and 4.9.3.2 using a concentration
at or near 75% of range.
4.9.4 ERT has established a tolerance limit describing the maximum
allowable deviation of an in-station calibrator from a reference
calibrator in this field verification. That tolerance limit
is ±10% for each concentration generated (4.9.3.1 and 4.9.3.3).
4.9.5 If field diagnosis of the questionable in-station calibrator
(deviation from reference calibrator of more than 10%)
does not resolve the problem, the calibrator should be
removed and returned to a calibrator repair and calibration
facility.
5.0 Documentation
5.1 All calibrations and calibration checks will be fully documented in ink
including all quantitative data in legible form.
5.2 All calibration and calibration check documentation will be written
at the time of the calibration or calibration check on the analyzer-
specific calibration forms and all sections of the forms will be com-
pleted by the operator, using "N/A" (not applicable) as needed.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: FIELD CALIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS AIR QUALITY ANALYZERS
5.3 Each calibration data sheet will be a 3-part NCR form. There are a
white original and pink and yellow copies. Where the 3-part form is
not available, the operator shall make 3 parts by using carbon or
photocopying after calibration, or other means. In any case, there
will be 3 copies before distribution of data.
5.4 Appropriate documentation will be recorded on the field station log and
on the strip chart. The notations on the strip chart should explain
each significant deflection of the recorder pen (e.g., a calibration
point, baseline, amp check, adjustment, etc.)
5.5 The calibrated analyzer will be labeled with a calibration slicker
showing the analyzer S/N, the date of the calibration and the signature
of the operator.
5.6 Upon completion of the calibration, documentation will be distributed
as follows:
5.6.1 White original - for approval, to District Supervisor, as
defined in 2.0 and designated by the supervisor of the person
operating the analyzer.
5.6.2 Strip chart - when the calibration is recorded on a strip
chart, the strip chart will accompany the original data
sheets. The portion of strip chart to be sent will include
from the start of the roll to some point after the calibration.
These charts, then, will not be included in the routine data
submission, and the Field Tech should so note in the next
routine submission.
5.6.3 Pink copy - with the original, to District Supervisor, as is
done with pink copies of regular data sheets and logs.
5.6.4 Yellow copy - retained in station or in instrument record
book.
5.6.5 If the calibration is performed by someone other than the
routine operators, such as a Field Service technician or
engineer, then the person who performed the calibration
should have a copy of his or her work. A photocopy may
be made for that purpose, or the pink or yellow copy may be
taken by the Field Service person, leaving the field tech
responsible for making a photocopy replacement.
5.7 In the EQB operated networks, it is the Field Technician's responsibility
to cut charts and transmit them to the District Supervisor with the
data sheets.
Page io of n
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 003
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Pageu< .of, ,i
Standard Operating .Procedure n t
L>ate.< : 3/1 /79
Title: Numbe^: . Q04 :
Revision: q
EQB Test Equipment Calibration
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH S TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
Under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/781
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure Date; 3/1/79
Title: Test Equipment Calibration/Repair Number: 004
Revision: 0
The following equipment calibration/repair procedure applies to any
piece of test equipment which is used as a secondary standard for calibration
or repair of instrumentation requiring traceabijity to the National Bureau of
Standards. This procedure does not necessarily apply to test equipment used
for research and development projects.
Calibration Requirements
Test equipment shall be calibrated and/or repaired by a qualified service
organization with equipment traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
Calibration will be performed at scheduled intervals with a two-week grace period
for scheduling purposes. The interval will be that recommended by the
manufacturer.
Calibration service organizations will be specified by the Engineering
Division. The calibration service organization shall provide (1) a record of
calibration data and (2) certification that the calibrations are traceable to the
National Bureau of Standards.
Scheduled Calibration
Specific test equipment will be assigned to either a laboratory, an indi-
vidual or District Supervisor. The location of equipment is tracked via EQB's
documentation procedures. The laboratory individual or Electronics Lab Supervisor
to whom equipment is assigned will be notified by the Electronics Lab whenever a
scheduled equipment calibration is due. The Supervisor is responsible for
arranging for replacement equipment for field personnel.
Unscheduled Calibrations or Repairs
In the event that any of the following apply, the laboratory or district
office supervisor should be notified immediately and the equipment removed from
service until recertification can be completed.
1) A piece of test equipment does not have a valid calibration sticker.
2) A calibration seal is broken.
3) A unit is found to be out of calibration or to require repair.
The D.O. Supervisor is responsible for arranging for replacement equipment
for field personnel.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure Date; 3/1/79
Title: Test Equipment Calibration/Repair Number: 004
Revision: 0
New Test Equipment
Whenever a new piece of test equipment is ordered, the purchase requisition
should specify "certificate of traceability to NBS required." A copy of the
purchase order should be forwarded to the Instrument Records Office. Upon receipt
of the equipment, the certificate should be sent to the Instrument Records
Office.
Calibration Records
Associated with each piece of test equipment is an equipment Calibration/
Repair Record, Form (Attachment #1) indicating the date of the last calibration
and the due date for the next calibration. These records are maintained in the
Test Equipment File by instrument type and manufacturer's serial number. The
specific Calibration Data Record is filed with each Equipment Calibration/
Repair Record.
Originals of calibration data and certification records must be forwarded to
the AQ Lab for inclusion in the Test Equipment File.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
EQB
INSTRUMENT CALIBRA. .uN LABORATORY
EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION/REPAIR RECORD
SECTION A - GENERAL
Model
Serial Number
Manufacturer
Interval
Date of Acquisition
Cal. Lab.
Calibration Inst. No.
Description
Vendor
P.O. Number
Date
Notes
m
SECTION B - CALIBRATION MAINTENANCE RECORD ^
Calibration
Remarks
Repair Required
Due
Completed
By
FRM No.
By
Date
1172a(4/79)
-------
SECTION C - REPAIR RECORD
Date
Malfunction
Code
Corrective Action
Code
By
FRM No.
From
To
SECTION D - MODIFICATION RECORD
Date
Modification
Authorized
By
Completed
By
1172-1 a (4/79)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 005
Revision: 0
Routine Operation of the Teco Model 43
Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. T 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation of the Teco Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SC^
Analyzer
1.0 Applicability
This procedure is to be used as a supplement to SOP 001 EQB Field Site
Routine Visit at those sites where SO2 is measured with the Teco Model 43
Pulsed Fluorescence analyzer. Responsibilities and the methodology of data
validation outlined in SOP 001 apply to this procedure and to the use of
Status/Data Assessment Sheet 001-A.
2.0 Checks to be Performed Every Site Visit
2.1 Check that the shelter temperature is between 67°F and 78°F, and that
the manifold pump and calibration controller are functioning properly.
Check that the calibrator temperature is within ±0.1°C of designated.
Note any adjustments in Field Station Log.
Teco 43 Checks - Note whether ball height on rotameter is between 2 and
4. If it is not, clean the flow capillary. Open the left section of
the front panel. Check that pressure regulator reads 10 ± 0.1 in. Hg.
Adjust if necessary using the diaphragm regulator.
SO2 Data Checks - roll back strip chart to the time of the last visit.
Check that all prior baselines are 0 ± 0.005 ppm (0.10V). If recorder
has been offset 10%, allowable baseline range will be 0.9 VDC to 1.1 VDC
on strip chart. Check that all spans are within ±15% of designated.
Adjust baseline and/or perform manual span check to verify that instrument
is now within calibration specs, if necessary.
3.0 Manual Calibration
Perform a manual zero and span check at least once a week unless specified
more frequently in network QA plan.
4.0 Weekly Checks
4.1 Check that the cooling fan and pump are working. Inspect the capillary.
Clean or replace if necessary. Verify that the UV lamp is working by
listening for a clicking sound which indicates pulsation.
4.2 Perform PC board full scale check according to the manufacturer's
manual. Also perform full scale check of output amplifier board. Note
whether outputs are within specs listed on sheet.
5.0 Bi-Weekly Maintenance
Every other week change the particulate filter and indicate on the assessment
sheet.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
Page of
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 005
Revision: 0
2.2
2.3
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation of the Teco Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent
S02 Analyzer
6.0 Periodic Maintenance
Multipoint span checks should be performed according to the schedule indicated
in the network QA plan, and the instrument'should be recalibrated if necessary.
Every 12 months the hydrocarbon cutter should be replaced and this action
noted in the field station log.
7.0 Audits
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of this proce-
dure. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
Page of
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 005
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET 001A
TECO MODEL 43 S02
SOP 001
NETWORK:
STATION:
STATION NO.:
OPERATOR:
WEEK ENDING:
DATE:
LOCAL STANDARD TIME:
DATA
Valid Suspect Invalid
/ or NO*
SHELTER STATUS:
Temp. = 67° - 78°F?
Manifold Pump OK?
Calibration Controller OK?
CALIBRATOR:
Temp. = Des. ±0.1°C
TECO 43 STATUS:
Flow Rate = 2 to 4 SCFH?
Pressure at 10 ± 0.1" Hg?
Strip Chart Time, Supply
Marked?
TECO 43 DATA:
All Prior BLs 0 ppm
± 0.005 ppm (0.10V)
All prior Spans ±15%
of Desig.
Entire prior chart OK?
MANUAL CALIBRATION: DATE
Zero = 0 ± 0.005 ppm (0.10V)?
Calibrator Flow ± .5 mm of Des.?
Teco output ±15% of Des.?
WEEKLY CHECKS:
Cooling fan working? Pump OK? Capillaries clean? UV lamp working?
PC Board: FS = 10 ± 0.01 Volts?
Output Board: FS - 10 ± 0.01 V?
BI-WEEKLY: Particulate filter changed?
•Explanations of all NO entries should appear in the field station log.
EQB Form 001-A
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: 3/6/79
Title: Number: 006
Revision: 0
MULTIPOINT SPAN CHECK/FIELD CALIBRATION
OF THE TECO 43 S02 ANALYZER
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1
Standard Operating Procedure Date;
Title: MULTIPOINT SPAN CHECK/FIELD CALIBRATION: TECO 43 S02 ANALYZER Number:
Revision:
A. A multipoint span check and/or field calibration is required under the
following circumstances.
• routine multipoint calibration due,
• span check deviates more than 15% from its designated value,
• when requested by the field supervisor,
• routine audits, or
• following any maintenance which may cause a calibration shift (see
manual) NOTE: If the in-station calibrator is a Meloy CS-10 or Teco 143
with a NBS traceable permeation tube, it may be used for field
calibration.-
B. Initial Calibration Check
1) Connect a DVM to the recorder output of the analyzer. Prior
to the calibration, the analyzer should be electronically
calibrated and pneumatically adjusted. The required components
to be checked or calibrated are:
• amplifier pc board (0-10V),
• output board (0-10V),
• pressure regulator (-10in. Hg), and
• flow rate (1-4 scfh).
Refer to analyzer manual Section IV.D.la through Ic for detailed
instructions.
2) Direct the calibrator zero air into the Teco 43 analyzer.
After stabilization (about 20 minutes) record the observed
value. Adjust the zero to 0.00 ± .0005 ppm (0± 01V on the
DVM) if necessary with the front panel zero pot. NOTE: On
.5 ppm range, Volts = ppm x 20.
3) Generate the highest designated SO2 concentration from the calibrator.
After the TECO 43 output has stabilized, record the designated and
observed outputs on the enclosed form. Do not make any adjustments to
the Teco 43 analyzer at this point.
4) Generate other designated concentrations of span gas from the calibrator.
After stabilization at each point, record the designated and observed
outputs. Then, repeat Step 2.
of 3
3/1/79
006
0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: MULTIPOINT SPAN CHECK/FIELD CALIBRATION: TECO 43 SO-
ANALYZER
5) Calculate the absolute percentage deviation at all test points, using
the following equation:
% deviation = Des(ppm) - Obstppn) 100
Des(ppm)
where
Des. = designated
Obs. = observed
6) If the absolute deviation is within 10%, it is optional to perform the
adjusted calibration. If the in-station calibrator was used for the
multipoint check, return the calibrator to Remote position and set the
rotameter to ball height back to the designated daily span check setting.
Be sure the analyzer is sampling ambient air from the shelter manifold.
7) If any of the absolute percentage deviations is greater than 10%,
proceed to step C, Adjusted Calibration. If any of the absolute percentage
deviations is greater than 30%, consult your District Superviser before
proceeding with the calibration.
C. Adjusted Calibrations
1) Direct the calibrator's highest designated concentration of span gas
into the analyzer sample port.
2) After the analyzer output has stabilized, unlock the analyzer span pot,
adjust the span pot so that the analyzer reads the designated values
±5%.
3) After the adjustment on the span pot, repeat the zero baseline check,
readjust if necessary.
4) Repeat step 1 through 3 until no further adjustment is required on both
zero and span pot.
5) Generate the calibrator's other designated concentrations of span gas.
Refer to 40 CFR 58 Appendix A.
6) Let the analyzer sample the calibration gas for 20 minutes at each
designated test point.
7) Record the stable reading on the form provided. NOTE: No adjustment
should be made after step 4.
8) Calculate the absolute percent of deviation on all the designated test
points as in step B5.
9) If the absolute deviation is less than 5% at all test points, field
multipoint calibration is completed.
Page ^ of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 006
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: MULTIPOINT SPAN CHECK/FIELD CALIBRATION: TECO 43 S02
ANALYZER
10) If the absolute deviation is more than 5% on any point, repeat the
adjusted multipoint calibration. If the repeated adjusted multipoint
calibration still cannot meet the specification, then report to field
supervisor for further instruction.
11) If the in-station calibrator is being used, return the calibrator to
Remote position. Set the rotameter ball height on the calibrator back
to the designated daily span check setting. Return the analyzer to
sample ambient air.
D. Mark any pertinent comments on EQB Form 006-A, sign and date it, and return
copies as follows.
1) Return in data package with strip charts (The Scientific Inventories
and Reports Division will foreward to QA coordinator).
2) Return to District Office.
3) Retain and file at site.
Affix a calibration sticker to the instrument.
E. Quality Assurance Audit
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct periodic audits of
this procedure. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 006
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
FIELD CALIBRATION
S/N:
Reason for calibration:
Multipoint calibrator:
PC Board check
Output Board check
Pressure adjusted
Flow rate: scfh
ERT No.
S/N
output: V
output:
pressure: in Hg
EQB FORM 006-A
-------
EQB
Network Site Instrument Type S/N Date
Calibrator: Type S/N Last Cal Date Temp: Des °C Obs °C
DVM: Mfg and Model : S/N Last Cal Date
Complete where Applicable: Initial:
7firn pnt
span pnt
Final:
zero pot
span pot
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Flow
Flow
vD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(DP
Setting
U/min)
Vo
PPM0
V
PPMq
V
PPM0
A%*
Zero Air
0±.005
(0-10V)
(0)*
(0)*
(O)'
K 10%)
In-Station Calibrator S/N
In-Station Calibrator Verification:
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)*
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
A%*
TP1
TP2
*A%
K±10%)
¦ [V]
Signature:
Avg. A% =
x 100
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
1772 (12/78)
-------
EQB
CALIBRATION CURVE
Network: Date:
Site: Time:
Sjte No.: Analyzer S/N: .
Operator: Calibrator S/N:
0.5
0.4
a.
a
"a
c
o
Q.
u
®
0c
k
0)
N
>
"3
c
<
0.3
0.2
0.1
p^—
/
/
/
!
/
/
i
I
/
/
i
I
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
I
/
/
¦
/
/
/
'
/
]
/
/
|
/
/
I
0.1
0.2 C.3
Input Concentration (PPM)
0.4
0.5
1773 (12/78)
Page 3 of 3
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 007
Revision: o
ROUTINE SITE VISIT AND PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
OF THE BENDIX 8501-5CA CO ANALYZER
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH $ TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
Under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH &TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
rd . ROUTINE SITE VISIT AND PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OF
BENDIX 8501-5CA CO ANALYZER
1.0 Applicability
1.1 Applicability. This SOP addresses sites where carbon monoxide is
measured using the Bendix 8501-5CA. This procedure is to be used
as a supplement to SOP 001 EQB Field Site Routine Visit.
2.0 Data Validity and Instrument Status
2.1 The Status/Data Assessment Sheet 001-B is to be filled out at least
once each week.
2.2 The check-off procedure requires the entering of a check (/), indi-
cating YES, or a NO for each item. The entering of a NO often indicates
that on-site corrective action or notification of district personnel
for corrective action assistance is required. The appropriate action
should be taken and stated in the field station log.
2.3 Spaces are provided on the sheets for identifying data as valid,
suspect, or invalid. The field technician is required to classify all
data obtained during the week, by date and time, based on the criteria
listed and THE BEST JUDGMENT OF THE FIELD TECHNICIAN.
3.0 Routine Checks (each site visit)
3.1 Bendix 8501-5CA CO Analyzer (Status/Data Assessment Sheet)
3.1.1 Status - Verify that strip chart time is accurate, supply is
adequate until next visit, and date and time of visit are
clearly marked. Check that sample flow is set at ball height
3.0 and pressure of calibration gases are greater than
300 psi. NOTE: If ball height requires adjustment see
Paragraph 4.1.2 before adjusting.
3.1.2 Data - Verify that all prior zeros are between 8% and 12% of
full recorder scale (0 ± 1 ppm) and all prior spans are
within ±5% of designated span value. If not, does manual
recalibration correct the problem? (See weekly checks.)
NOTE: This instrument is run with a zero instrument baseline
and a 10% baseline offset on the recorder. Thus, the full
scale on the recorder will be 45 ppm.
3.1.3 If the unit is not capable of automatic zero and span,
these functions should be performed manually at each visit
and results indicated under status. See weekly checks for
calibration procedure.
Page 1 of 2
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 007
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 0174Z
12840 (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure Date;
Title: ROUTINE SITE VISIT AND PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OF BENDLX Number: 007
8501-5CA CO ANALYZER Revision: 0
4.0 Weekly Checks
4.1 Perform the checks indicated on the assessment sheet. Drain any
condensate in the glass bowl containing the sample filter. Normal
replacement interval is once a month for the sample filter and once
every six months for the gas filter. Note filter replacements in the
log. Perform a manual calibration as follows.
4.1.1 With instrument in the 50 ppm (Normal Operational) range, set
mode selector valve to zero.
4.1.2 Note if ball height is 3.0 ± 1 cm. Do not readjust at this
time. Complete steps 4.1.3-4.1.5. Then readjust flow to
Ball Height 3.0 and complete steps 4.1.6-4.1.8.
4.1.3 After the output has stabilized, put filter switch to out
position. Verify that noise extreme is 0.2 VDC or less.
4.1.4 Return filter switch to in and record initial zero as read on
a DVM. Make no adjustment.
NOTE: On 50 ppm range, PPM=VDC X 5.
4.1.5 Turn mode selector valve to span. After instrument output
has stabilized, record SPAN value as read on a DVM and
converted to ppm. If ball height was 3.0 ± 1 cm and initial
zero is 0 ± 1 ppm and initial span is within ±5% of the tank
concentration, the instrument is in calibration. If the
readings are outside these limits, proceed to step 4.1.6.
4.1.6 Turn mode selector valve to zero. After stabilization, reset
zero adjust to obtain a zero ±1 ppm output.
4.1.7 Turn mode selector valve to span. After stabilization, reset
span adjust to obtain an output equivalent to the designated
cylinder output ±5%.
4.1.8 Return mode selector valve to zero and check that output
after stabilization is as set in step 4.1.6. If it is not,
repeat steps 4.1.6 through 4.1.8 until stable readings are
obtained. Note that final values are in spec and the previous
and current settings for zero and span pots.
NOTE: Calibrations should be performed only with certified
cylinders of gas.
5.0 Quality Assurance Audit
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct periodic audits of the
procedure discussed above and corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET
BENDIX 8501-5CA-CO ANALYZER
NETWORK
STATION
STATION NUMBER
OPERATOR
WEEK ENDING
DATE
LOCAL STANDARD TIME
/ or NO*
DATA
VALID SUSPECT INVALID
(Show date and time for each
category)
SHELTER STATUS: Temp. (67-78°F)
Manifold Pump OK?
BENDIX CO STATUS: S/N
Strip Chart time, supply
marked?
Sample flow = 3.00 ± 1 cm?
Cal. Gases > 300 psi?
DATA: Strip chart?
All prior Os 8-12%?
All prior spans ±5% of Des.?
If not, is recal. OK?
Entire prior chart OK?
NORMAL CONDITIONS?
WEEKLY CHECKS
BENDIX CO
Back pressure ± 1 psi of Des.?
Sample filter clean? Gas filter clean?
Manifold connections tight? Vent lines unobstructed?_
Unfiltered noise < 0.2V?
CALIBRATION:
Initial: Zero ppm Span ppm
Final: Zero = 0 ± 1 ppm? Span = Des. ppm ± 5%?
Zero Pot. Prev./Current / 'Span Pot. Prev./Current /
*Explanation of all NO entries should appear in field station log.
E0B Form 001-B
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: Number: 008
Revision: 0
Routine Operation And Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation And Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
1.0 Applicability
This procedure is to be used as a supplement to SOP 001, EQB Field Site
Routine Visit at those sites where ozone is measured with the Dasibi Model 1003-
PC Ozone Monitor. This SOP includes both routine operation and maintenance of
the instrument. There is practically no reason to remove the instrument from the
shelter since it is relatively easy to maintain.
2.0 Checks to be Performed Every Site Visit
2.1 Check that the shelter temperature is between 67°F and 78°F and that
the manifold pump is functioning properly.
2.2 Ozone Data Checks - Roll back strip chart to time of last visit, check
for any indications of noisy operation and verify chart time. Instru-
ment's zero offset should be recorded on strip chart.
2.3 Sample flow - The front panel flowmeter should read 2 1/min. Tap the
flowmeter to make sure the float is not stuck and is actually reading
the proper value.
2.4 Span - Turn the mode switch to SPAN, record the readout value from the
front panel. The first three digits of the display should agree with
the first three span set switches.
2.5 Analog span - With the mode switch still in SPAN, read the analog value
off of the strip chart recorder. If SPAN is 54.950 then the recorder
should read 9.50. If it does not, adjust to the proper value. A
record of SPAN numbers should be kept with all data to serve as a
reference should it ever be necessary to adjust data later.
2.6 Control Frequency - Switch the mode switch to CONTROL FREQ and record
the value. The reading should be between 23.0 and 28.0, if below 23.0,
adjust to 27.5 by repositioning detector. Refer to manual, Section 2.3.5.
2.7 Sample Frequency - Switch to SAMPLE FREQ. and record the value.
Reading should be between 35.0 and 48.0. If below 35.0 the optics need
to be cleaned.
2.8 Zero Check - Switch to ZERO. The zero offset pot should be at zero.
Check the' recorder to make sure that it is actually recording zero. If
it is not, adjust the recorder zero or the instrument zero as described
in the operation section. If a zero adjustment is made repeat part 2.5
above.
2.9 Make sure all sample and manifold lines are connected as they should
be, especially if a calibration or repair has just been completed.
Check that the function switch is in the OPERATE mode.
Page l of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 008
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation and Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
3.0 Monthly Checks
3.1 Measure power supply voltages on mother board:
+5VDC ±0.25V
±15VDC ±0.75V
±24VDC ±1.2V
+200VDC ±20V
3.2 Cycle time adjust. Check cycle time by observing each time the L.E.D.
in the upper left hand corner of the display flashes. It should be
more than 20 seconds and less than 30 seconds. If necessary, adjust R8
on the timing circuit board.
3.3 Measure temperature control voltage on mother board;
2.9VDC ±.2V (old style)
4.4VDC ±.2V (new style)
3.4 Adjust analog zero by connecting DVM to recorder output terminals. Put
mode selector switch in zero. Adjust recorder output with R3 on D/A
board.
3.5 Move mode switch to span. The first 3 digits of the display should
agree with the first three span set switches. Connect DVM to recorder
terminals. Voltage displayed on DVM should be the same as the last 3
digits on the analyzer display. (Example: span reading is 54.590.
DVM should read 9.50 volts ± .IV.)
3.6 Move mode switch to sample frequency. Reading should be between 35.0
and 48.0. If it is too high, adjust UV lamp. If it is too low, clean
optics. If it is still too low after the optics have been cleaned,
adjust the UV lamp. If the reading is too low after UV lamp has been
adjusted, the lamp should be replaced, (see manual)
3.7 Move mode switch to control frequency. Reading should be between 23.0
and 28.0. If it is either too high or too low, adjust control detector,
(see manual)
3.8 Move mode switch to operate. Disconnect power to valve and sample
pump. Make sure the zero offset swtich is at the zero position.
Remove the 3 jumpers on the logic board.
Observe the following sequence on the display.
a) Resets to zero and pauses.
b) Counts up to the present span number and pauses.
c) Counts down to some number close to .005 and pauses.
Allow the analyzer to complete several cycles. The displayed number
should not change more than ±2 digits. Find the average of the cycles
(ex: .049, .047, .046, .050, .049 = .048).
Page 2 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 008
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation and Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
3.9 Subtract .050 from the average. (Ex: .048 - .050 + -.002.) This is
the analyzer zero offset. In this case it is -2PPB. Affix a card
displaying this number on the analyzer's front panel.
3.10 Reconnect power to sample pump and valve.
3.11 System Leak Check - Remove the sample line from the rear fitting and
hold your finger over the fitting opening. The flow, as indicated on
the rotameter, should drop to zero. If it does not, there is a leak in
the system which must be closed off.
3.12 Solenoid Valve Leak Check - Remove the scrubber. Block the ell connector
on the side of the solenoid where the scrubber was connected (your
finger will do). Watch the flowmeter and notice that the flow drops to
zero for 1/2 of the measurement cycle and returns to its original flow
for the other half.
Now block the tee on the other side of the solenoid where the other
side of the scrubber was connected and at the same time block the
sample inlet connector. If the flow does not drop all the way to zero,
there is a leak across the solenoid and it should be replaced.
3.13 Scrubber Efficiency Check - Turn on the built-in ozone source, direct
its output to the analyzers inlet, and adjust it until the monitor
reads between 0.5 and 1.0 ppm. The ozonator need not be stabilized for
this test so there is no need to wait for the source to warm up. Once
the instrument is reading ozone, switch the mode switch to SAMPLE FREQ.
When the instrument is reading sample frequency, record at least 5
consecutive readings in order to find a good average. After the last
reading, switch the ozonator off but leave the air flow on and take 5
more readings. Average these 5 readings and subtract the first average
from the number thus obtained. If you did not notice any drift in the
frequency while you were recording the numbers, then the difference
between the two averages represents how much ozone is contained in the
reference (zero) gas. The scrubber efficiency should be better than
96%. If not, replace scrubber.
3.14 Replace particulate filter.
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 008
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET
DASIBI MODEL 1003 C>3 MONITOR
Form 001-C
NETWORK:
STATION:
STATION NO.:
OPERATOR:
WEEK ENDING:
DATE:
LOCAL STANDARD TIME:
DATA
Valid Suspect Invalid
/ or NO*
SHELTER STATUS:
Temp. = 67° - 78°F?
Manifold Pump OK?
DASIBI DAILY CHECKS:
Sample Flow 2 £/min
Span No. - 54.950
Control Frequency between
23.0 and 28.0
Sample Frequency between
35.0 and 48.0
Zero Offset Pot
Zero Check
Lines Connected Properly
DASIBI MONTHLY CHECKS
Mother Board Voltages
+5VDC ± 0.25V
±15VDC ± 0.75V
±24VDC ± 1.2V
±200VDC ± 20V
Cycle Time between
20 and 30 sec
Temperature Control Voltage
Analog Zero
Span = 54.950 .
Sample Frequency between
35.0 and 48.0
Control Frequency between
23.0 and 28.0
Determine Zero Offset
System Leak Check
Solenoid Valve Leak Check
Scrubber Efficiency >96%
Replace Particulate Filter
*Explanation of all NO entries should appear in field station log
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure _. 7/1/7Q
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 009
Revision: 0
Routine Field Operation of the
Meloy CS-10 S02 Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1 of 1
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Field Operation of the Meloy CS-10 SO^ Calibrator
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 009
Revision: 0
1.0 Applicability
This procedure is to be used as a supplement to SOP's 001-006 EQB Field
Routine Visit, and 2000-224 Multipoint Span Check/Field Calibration: Teco
43 S02 Analyzer at those sites where the Meloy CS-10 is used as the in-
station calibrator for the Teco Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescence S02 Analyzer.
2.0 Checks to be performed every site visit: Verify that ball height is at
designated value. Verify that cooling fan and pump are operating and check
if temperature control pilot lamp is flashing, indicating oven is at proper
temperature. (Note nonflashing lamp may be due to defective lamp and not to
improper oven temperature - replace lamp to verify this case.)
3.0 Maintenance. The calibrator will be overhauled and calibrated every six
months according to SOP 013.
4.0 The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct audits of this procedure.
Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
APPENDIX C
ELECTRONIC LAB SOPs
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure n t
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 010
Revision: 0
CALIBRATION OF STRIP CHART RECORDERS
Prepared by
ERT for the
Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: 3/1/79
Title: CALIBRATION OF STRIP CHART RECORDERS Number: 010
Revision: 0
1.0 Applicability
1.1 General
The following strip chart recorder calibration procedure applies to any
strip chart recorder used for data recording in the EQB monitoring
network. Detailed procedures for recorder calibrations are available
in the manufacturer's instruction manual and are not covered in this
document.
1.2 Scheduled Calibrations
Recorder calibrations will be performed at six month intervals with a
two week grace period for scheduling purposes unless otherwise specified
in the program requirements.
1.3 Unscheduled Calibrations
In the event that any of the following applies, the unit should be
recalibrated and a new calibration sticker affixed.
A. A recorder does not have a valid calibration sticker.
B. A recorder is found to be out of calibration or has been repaired
in the field.
2.0 Required Test Equipment
Voltage Source - Datel DVC 8500 or equivalent
3 1/2 Digit Multimeter - Fluke 8000A or equivalent
3.0 Supporting Documents
Manufacturer's Recorder Instruction Manuals.
4.0 Calibration Procedure
4.1 Data Sheet Information
4.1.1 Calibration data will be recorded on Form 010-A (copy .
attached). Space is available for three channels; for units
with more than three channels use two or more sheets.
4.1.2 Readings will be taken at zero, mid scale, and full scale.
Determine and log the chart reading which corresponds to each
of these points. (For example the chart readings will be 0,
5.0 and 10.0 for 0-10 volt chart paper; for -22° to +122°
paper they will be -22°, +50°, and +122°.)
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: CALIBRATION OF STRIP CHART RECORDERS
4.1.3 Determine and record the designated input current or voltage
for each of these points.
Note: If a current source is not available for current input
recorders, a voltage input may be determined by multiplying
the internal recorder resistance by the current input.
Example - An A601C recorder has an internal resistance of
1400 ohms and an input range of 0-1 milliamp. This corresponds
to a voltage input of 0-1.4 volts.
4.1.4 Determine the "Tolerance" in the same units (voltage or
current) as the designated input and log on the data sheet.
The tolerance is listed in the manufacturer's manual usually
as a percent of full scale accuracy.
4.1.5 Write down all other pertinent information on the data sheet.
4.2 Calibration Measurements
To obtain a reading, input the signal required to allign the pen with
the desired chart division and log the multimeter reading.
4.2.1 Record the initial current or voltage necessary to drive the
pen to the designated chart readings.
4.2.2 Make any necessary adjustments as described in the recorder
instruction manual.
4.2.3 Record the final input used to align the pen to the designated
chart reading. If these are not within tolerance of the
designated input, arrange to repair or replace the recorder.
4.3 Affix a properly filled out calibration sticker to the recorder and
return form copies as follows.
1) - Return with week's data.
2) - Forward to district office.
3) - Retain at site.
5.0 Quality Assurance Audit
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct audits of the data
generated under this procedure. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 010
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
SOP 010
NETWORK NAME
SITE NAME
RECORDER TYPE S/N OPER:
CHANNEL INPUT RANGE CHART RANGE PARAMETER
1
2
3
STRIP CHART RECORDER CALIBRATION
PROJECT NO.
DATE
CHART DESIGNATED INITIAL FINAL
CHANNEL % SCALE READING INPUT TOLERANCE INPUT INPUT
1 0%
^50%
100%
0%
^50%
100%
0%
^50%
100%
TEST EQUIPMENT
TYPE SERIAL NO. CAL DUE DATE
EQB FORM 010-A
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/
Title: Number: 011
Revision: 0
LABORATORY CALIBRATION AND STABILITY CHECK FOR THE
TECO 43 PULSED FLUORESCENT S02 ANALYZER
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (13/78)
-------
Page 1 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure
T.tl LABORATORY STABILITY TEST FOR TECO 43 PULSED M " '
T«": FLUORESCENT SO, ANALYZER S "j
1.0 Applicability
The SOP applies to the laboratory checkout and calibration of Teco
Model 43 SO2 analyzers.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent)
Multipoint S02 calibrator
Teco 43 manual
3.0 Pre-Start-Up Inspection
1) Put the instrument on the bench.
2) Remove the instrument cover, thus exposing the internal components
of the instrument.
3) Remove the foam insert over the pump.
4) Check for possible damage during shipment.
5) Slide out the front panel electronics drawer and check that the
three printed circuit boards are secured in their connectors.
6} Inspect all the tubing connections, ensure that they are leak
tight.
7) Remove all foreign material from the instrument.
81 If the sample/zero/span mode is controlled externally, then bypass
the zero/span valve and sample valve, and connect the 1/4 " teflon
tubing from sample port directly to the permeation dryer.
4.0 Start-Up Inspection Procedure and Adjustment
11 Install the analyzer in the rack with cover off.
2) Connect laboratory zero air or external calibrator zero air to the
analyzer sample port.
31 Turn mode control on front panel to sample and range to 0.50.
41 Connect the recorder output to a 0-1Ov recorder and a DVM.
51 Verify that the front panel power switch is off.
6) Plug the instrument power cord to 115 V power outlet.
71 Turn the instrument power switch on.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: 3/1/79
Number: Oil
Revision: 0
Title:
LABORATORY STABILITY TEST FOR TECO 43 PULSED
FLUORESCENT S02 ANALYZER
8) Inspect the pump for proper operation.
9) Inspect the UV lamp for pulsations.
10) Adjust the sample pressure regulator to 10.in. Hg.
11) Verify the front panel rotameter ball height is between 2 to 4 scfh and
is stable.
12) Verify that the chassis cooling fan is on.
13) Slide the electronic unit forward in its housing and locate the two
toggle switches on the top of the first pc board.
14) Move the first toggle (F.S.) switch (SW2) to the right position.
15) Verify that the jumper wire on the output board is connected from the
center position to the 10 voltage output terminal.
16) The front panel meter should indicate a full-scale reading, the recorder
and DVM output should be 10VDC.
17) If the output is other than lOv full scale, refer to Manual Section
IV.D.l for electronic adjustment.
18) Return first toggle switch (F.S.) on amp. board to left (run) position.
19) Verify the second toggle switch (SWI) on the amp board is in the
center position.
20) If any of these tasks cannot be completed remove the instrument for
evaluation and repair. Use instrument manual as guideline.
5.0 Calibration and Stability Test
Instrument control settings
Mode switch: sample position.
Range ppm switch: 0.50 ppm.
Full scale switch, SW2: left position.
Time response switch; SWI: center position.
1) Verify that laboratory zero air or external calibration line is con-
nected to the analyzer's sample port.
2) Offset the analyzer baseline to 5% on the recorder.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 3 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure Date:
Title: Number: Oil
Revision: o
3) Set the instrument to sample zero air for at least 6 hours or overnight.
4) Inspect the recorder trace after Step 3. If the difference between
maximum and minimum output is less than 0.2VDC and it is not cyclic,
then proceed to Step 5. If it is more than 0.2VDC and erratic, locate
the cause and resolve it before proceeding to Step 5.
5) Reset the baseline to 0±0.01 VDC on the instrument.
6) Disconnect the zero air line from the sample port and connect the
laboratory S02 calibration gas line or external S02 gas lipe to the
sample port.
71 Generate approximately 0.35 ppm of SO2 from the laboratory calibration
system or from the external reference calibrator.
8) Let the analyzer sample the calibration gas for 20 minutes or until a
stable trace is established on the recorder chart.
9) Adjust the analyzer span pot to read the calibration gas concentration
±5%.
10} Lock the span pot at that setting.
Ill Let the analyzer sample the calibration gas at least 6 hours or overnight.
121 the recorder trace is stable after Step 12, and the maximum and
minimum deviation is less than 0.2 DCV and is not cyclic, then proceed
to Step 13. If the recorder trace is erratic and there is more than
0.2VDC deviation, locate the causes and repair it, then repeat Step 11.
131 Adjust the analyzer if necessary to read the concentration of calibra-
tion gas ±5%.
141 Disconnect the calibration gas line and connect the zero gas line. Let
the analyzer sample 20 minutes of zero air.
151 Readjust the zero baseline if necessary. Repeat the calibration at
Q.35 ppm and zero baseline until there is no further adjustment.
16} Generate a set of concentrations from the laboratory calibration system
or from the external reference calibrator. The concentrations should
be approximately
a) 0.300 ppm SC^
b} 0.225 ppm SC>2
cl 0.150 ppm SO2
d) 0.075 ppm SC>2
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 4 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 011
Revision: 0
17) Let the analyzer sample 20 minutes at each concentration and record the
stable reading.
18) If the absolute deviation on each concentration is less than 10% of the
designated values, the analyzer can be cleared from the rack. If the
absolute deviation on any concentration is more than 10% of the desig-
nated values, repeat the multipoint calibration. If the repeated
multipoint calibration still cannot meet the specification, remove the
instrument from the rack, locate and repair the problem, then repeat
the stability test and calibration from the beginning.
19) Affix a properly filled out calibration sticker to the instrument.
20). The divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct periodic audits
of this procedure. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
SOP Oil
LABORATORY CALIBRATIONS AND STABILITY TEST FOR TECO 43
S/N:
ERT NO.:
Date start:
Operator:
Pre-start up inspection O.K.
Pump 0. K.
UV Lamp O.K.
Sample pressure
in Hg
Flow rate:
scfh.
PC board O.K.
(lOv full scale)
Output board O.K.
(lOv full scale on recorder)
Baseline stability:
Baseline @
Span stability:
V.
Deviation:
Deviation:
EQB FORM 011-A
-------
EQB
Network Site Instrument Type S/N Date
Calibrator: Type S/N Last Cat Date Temp: Des °C Obs °C
DVM: Mfg and Model S/N Last Cal Date
Complete where Applicable: Initial:
7prn pnt
cpan pnt
Final:
zero pot . ...
cpan pnt
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Flow
Flow
VD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)*
Setting
U/min)
v0
PPMq
V
PPMq
V
PPM0
A%*
Zero Air
0±.005
(0-10V)
(0)*
(0)*
(0)*
K 10%)
In-Station Calibrator S/N
In-Station Calibrator Verification:
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)»
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
A%*
TP1
TP2
>A%
(<±10%)
¦ [Vs]
Signature:
Avg. A% =
x 100
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
1772 (12/78)
-------
EQB
CALIBRATION CURVE
Network: Date:
Site: Time:
Site No.: Analyzer S/N:
Operator: Calibrator S/N:
0.5
0.4
2
a.
&
8
c
o
a
(A
0)
0C
«
N
_>¦
(0
c
<
0.3
0.2
0.1
""
—
—
"7
/
—
—
—
y
—
—
/
/
—
/
—
—
/
\
—
—
—
—
—*
/
/_
/
-—
i
i
—
—
t
/
/
/
'
¦
/
/!
,
/
i
/
/
/
— -
-
—
—
—
!
i
/
i
/
|
/
I
i : i
i
0.1
0.2 C.3
Input Concentration (PPM)
0.4
0.5
1773 (12/78)
Page 3 of 3
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure n, ...
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 012
Revision: 0
Laboratory Calibration and Stability Check
For The Bendix 8501-5CA CO Analyzer
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Laboratory Calibration and Stability Check For the Bendix
8501-5CA CO Analyzer
1.0 Applicability
This SOP applies to the laboratory overhaul, checkout, and calibration of
the Bendix 8501-5CA Infrared Gas Analyzer. This should be conducted semi-
anually. The adjustment and calibration are also applicable in field use.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent)
Oscilloscope
Laboratory calibration system (span gas dilution system or bottled CO in
required concentrations)
8501-5CA manual
3.0 Pre-start up
3.1 Put the instrument on the bench.
3.2 Remove the instruments two front covers, thus exposing the internal
components.
3.3 Check for possible damage during shipment - i.e. loose pc board etc.
3.4 Slide out optical bench drawer and inspect for visible damage.
3.5 Inspect all the tubing connections, ensure that they are leak tight.
3.6 Remove all foreign material from the instrument.
3.7 Replace input sample filter and gas filter.
4.0 Start Up Inspection Procedure
4.1 Install the analyzer in the rack with covers off.
4.2 Connect laboratory zero air or external calibrator zero air to the
analyzer sample port.
4.3 Connect external calibration source of CO at a 1000 ppm concentration.
4.4 Connect the recorder output to a 0-10V recorder and a DVM.
4.5 Verify that the front panel power switch (in range selector) and
pump switch are in off position.
4.6 Plug the instrument power cord to 115V power outlet (grounded).
4.7 Turn the pump switch on.
4.8 Inspect the pump for proper operation, refer to manual section 5.2.3.
Page 1 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 012
Revision: n
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Laboratory Calibration and Stability Check for the Bendix
8501-5CA CO Analyzer
5.0 Adjustment
5.1 Turn the instrument on and allow it to stabilize for eight hours
(a minimum of two hours) prior to proceeding with adjustment procedures.
5.2 Slide the optical bench drawer forward on its track.
5.3 Refer to the enclosed "Bendix 8501-5CA Infrared CO Analyzer Adjustment
Checklist." Put zero and span pots in the 500 position.
5.3.1 Check ±15VDC Analyzer Cord power supply.
5.3.2 Check the +8VDC IR Source power supply.
5.3.3 Check the output of the chopper motor driving circuit.
5.3.4 Check the output of the 300 KHz oscillator.
5.3.5 Check chopper motor drive reference signal (at R-58).
5.3.6 Check output of the Chopper Reference Signal Shaper.
5.3.7 Adjust C-7. Refer to Section 5.5.1 of the manual but do not
span and zero instrument until the following adjustments
are completed.
5.3.8 Adjust zero balance of the optical system. Refer to
Section 5.5.2 of the manual. Do not span and zero the instru-
ment until the following adjustments are completed.
5.3.9 Adjust the phasing adjustment of the optical bench. Refer
to Section 5.5.3 of the manual. In addition to monitoring
TP6 for a maximum negative voltage as indicated in the
manual, connect an oscilloscope to the cathode of CR-7.
Proper phasing has been achieved when the observed waveform
is like an inverted greek letter omega (v) •
5.3.10 Zero the instrument following the procedure in section 3.3.1
of the manual.
5.3.11 Span the instrument following the procedure in section 3.3.2
of the manual. Use span gas concentration near 40 ppm.
6.0 Calibration
Perform a Primary Calibration following the procedures in Section 3.3.4
of the manual.
If the absolute deviation on each concentration is less than 10 percent
of the designated values, the analyzer can be cleared from the rack.
If the absolute deviation on any concentration is more than 10 percent
of the designated values, repeat the multipoint calibration. If the
repeated multipoint calibration still cannot meet the specification,
remove the instrument from the rack, locate and repair the problem,
then repeat the stability test and calibration from the beginning.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
Page 1 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 012
Revision: 0
6.1
6.2
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Laboratory Calibration and Stability Check for the Bendix
8501-5CA CO Analyzer
6.3 Affix a properly filled out calibration sticker to the instrument.
7.0 The divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct periodic audits of
this procedure. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 012
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
7903199
Bendix 8501-5CA Infrared CO Analyzer
Adjustment Checklist
Test Point
Designated Value
Observed
Most Probable Malfunction Cause
— See Manual —
Remedial
Action
Analyzer Card
+15 (Note 2)
+15 ± .03 volts
Analyzer Card Power Supply
A
-15 (Note 2)
-15 ± .03 volts
Analyzer Card Power Supply
A
TP 10 (Note 2)
+8.0 ± . 1 volts
IR Source Power Supply
A
TP9D (Note 3)
24 ± volt peak-to-peak square wave at 62 ± 3 Hz rate
Chopper Drive Circuit
A
T3 Terminal 7 (Note 3)
110 ± 5.5 volts peak-to-peak sine wave at 300 ± 30 kHz rate
300 KHz Oscillator
A
R58 (Note 3)
Approximately 150 millivolts peak-to-peak triangular waveform
Chopper Motor
A
TP7 (Note 3)
0 to -12 volt square wave at a 6.2 Hz rate
Chopper Motor Reference Signal Shaper
A
TP2 (Note 2)
0 ± 10 millivolts
C-7 Adjustment
B
TP6 (Notes 2 and 4)
0 ± 50 millivolts
Zero Balance Adjustment
C
TP6 (Notes 2 and 5 f
- 6.93 volts
Phasing Adjustment
D
TP9 (Notes 2 and 5)
-8.0 volts
Linearizer Circuit
A
TP5 (Notes 3 and 5)
Approximately 6 volts peak-to-peak triangular wave
Amplifier Circuit
A
at a 6.2 Hz rate
Control Card
+10 volts
TP 13 (Notes 2 and 5)
A
TP14 (Notes 2 and 5)
+10 volts
A
Notes: 1. All measurements referenced to common unless otherwise noted.
2. Measured with a high imput impedance voltmeter of 1 % accuracy.
3. Measured with an oscilloscope.
4. Measurement performed with zero gas injected into instrument.
5. Measurement performed with span gas of 1000 ppm CO concentration
injected into the instrument. With lower ppm span gases, the output
will be proportionately lower.
Remedial Action Key:
A. Replace board.
B. Adjust C-7, refer to manual section 5.5.1.
C. Adjust zero balance of optical bench, refer to section 5.5.2.
D. Correct phasing adjustment, refer to section 5.5.3.
-------
EQB
Network Site Instrument Type S/N Date
Calibrator: Type S/N Last Cat Date Temp: Des °C Obs °C
DVM: Mfg and Model S/N Last Cal Date
Complete where Applicable: Initial:
7f»rn pnt
cpan pnt
Final:
zero pot ...
cpan pnt
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Flow
Flow
vD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)*
Setting
U/min)
vo
PPMq
V
PPMq
V
PPM0
A%*
Zero Air
0±.005
(0-10V)
(0)*
(0)*
(O)*
« 10%)
In-Statinn Calihratnr S/N
In-Station Calibrator Verification:
Avg. A% =
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)»
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
>
*
TP1
TP2
*A% = x 100
(<±10%)
Signature:
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
1772 (12/78)
-------
EQB
CALIBRATION CURVE
Network:
Site:
Site No.:
Operator:
Date:
Time:
Analyzer S/N:
Calibrator S/N:
/
/
/
J
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
:
/
'
f
t
/
—
/
1
/
/
/
/
[
I
/
/
1
1
1
1
0.1
0.2 C.3
Input Concentration (PPM)
0.4
0.5
1773 (12/78)
Page 3 of 3
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure n,
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 013
Revision: 0
EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of
the Meloy CS-10 Multipoint SO2 Permeation Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 1 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure Date; 3/1/79
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Meloy CS-10 Number: gi3
Multipoint S02 Permeation Calibrator Revision: 0
1.0 Applicability
This SOP applies to the laboratory overhaul, checkout, and calibration
of the Meloy CS-10 Multipoint Permeation Tube Calibrators used in the EQB
network for calibrating SO2 analyzers.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent).
Thermistor or thermometer calibrated to 43°C ± 0.1°C (NBS traceable).
Leak Checker.
Mass flow meter (Hastings or equivalent) range 0 to 15 £/min (NBS traceable).
Meloy CS-10 manual.
Pressure gauge.
3.0 Preliminary checks, and pneumatic overhaul - refer to and fill out
forms 013A.
3.1 Visual Check
3.1.1 Check all lines are properly connected.
3.1.2 Verify capillary is installed and clean (thin metal tubing,
see manual).
3.1.3 Verify power switch and lamp operate.
3.1.4 Verify fan operation.
3.1.5 Check for any visual damage.
3.2 Penumatic system overhaul
3.2.1 Replace any discolored or otherwise damaged or suspect lines
(TFE teflon).
3.2.2 Replace or overhaul pump on a yearly basis.
3.2.3 Adjust pump pressure deadhead to 10 psi via the pressure
regulator.
3.2.4 Replace the charcoal in scrubber and particulate filter
cartridges.
3.2.4 Leak test the system - see note on instrument inspection and
overhaul report form.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Meloy CS-]0
Multipoint SO^ Permeation Calibrator
4.0 Rotameter Calibration
4.1 Insure that the system is leak free.
4.2 Block vent branch of outlet tee and connect the other branch to a mass
flow meter having a current calibration seal.
4.3 Read and record flow in liters per minute (£/min) for a minimum of 9
ball heights between 2 and 14.5 centimeters. (This is done for both
the steel and glass balls. Read the middle of the ball. Use the
attached form. (Form 013B)
4.4 Using arithmetic graph paper, plot ball height (in centimeters) versus
measured flow (in £/min for each ball).
4.5 Connect the plotted points with a straight line, if linear, or a smooth
curve, if not linear (for each ball).
5.0 Electronics Adjustment
5.1 Turn unit on and allow it to warm up for 30 minutes.
5.2 Verify the oven temperature is at 43°C ± 0.1°C with a calibrated
thermistor or thermometer; if not, adjust with variable resistor on
board.
5.3 Verify front panel light is flashing when oven is operating at proper
temperature.
6.0 Determination of output SO2 concentration
6.1 Install an NBS traceable certified 1 cm SO2 permeation tube in the
oven.
6.2 From the certification documentation determine the permeation rate
(pg/min).
6.3 Using the certified permeation rate, calculate and record the expected
output of the calibrator for each ball height measured in step 4.3,
using the following equation:
Ave Perm rate Y ,pproSL
Calibrator Output _ (yg/min) ^ug •*
Concentration (ppm) « 1_1.11
rr Calibrator flow @ each ball
height (ml/min)
Using all the output concentrations derived above, on semilog graph
paper, plot output concentrations in ppm on the log scale versus ball
height in centimeters on the arithmetic scale.
Page 2 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 013
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Meloy CS-10
Multipoint SC^ Permeation Calibrator
Using a french curve or a flex curve, draw a continuous curve
representative of the plotted points.
6.4 Using the curves derived in Section 6.3 determine the ball heights
that would produce the following concentrations:
0.05 ppm
0.10 ppm
0.20 ppm
0.30 ppm
0.45 ppm
and record the information on a calibration card noting the tube
serial number, date installed, and whether the ball height used for
obtaining above concentrations is the steel or the glass one.
Page 3 of '
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 013
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 6% Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
INSTRUMENT INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL REPORT
Manufacturer - Meloy
Instrument - Model CS10 SO^ Permeation Calibrator
Serial No.
Date:
Inspector:
EQB No.
(Yes or No)
(Unless Noted)
1. Visual Check:
All lines connected
Capillary installed
Power switch and lamp operate
Flashing lamp indicates proper Temperature (after 15 min. warmup)
Fan operating
Any visual damage
Other
2. Replace charcoal scrubber and particulate filter canisters
3. Pump Pressure Check (Deadhead) PSI
Adjusted to 10.0 PSI
Leak check. Increase flow to maximum and block output port. Balls
should drop to zero (some bounce will be noted).
Oven thermister resistance (with traceable lab. thermistor) KQHM
Readjust oven temp, with P6
Reset meter P3
30°C oven 35°C oven 43°C oven (check)
EQB Form 013A
-------
EFT
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Date: Technician:
Instrument: Typa: Modal:
Mfg: Ranae:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Model:
SN: Rj»ng«:
Calibration Gas:
~ Mass Flowmeter
Instrument ¦*
Voltage. Vqc
Flow Rate, /min
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
15
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
1814 (4/79)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Datc: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 014
Revision: 0
EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the
Teco 143 Multipoint Permeation Tube
SO2 Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube SC^ Calibrator
1.0 Applicability
This SOP applies to the laboratory overhaul, checkout, and calibration
of the TECO 143 Multipoint Permeation Tube Calibrators used in the
EQB network for calibrating SO2 analyzers.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent).
Thermistor or thermometer calibrated to 35°C ± 0.1°C (NBS traceable).
Leak Checker.
Mass flow meter (Hastings or equivalent) range 0 to 15 £/min (NBS traceable).
Teco 143 manual.
Pressure gauge.
3.0 Preliminary checks, and pneumatic overhaul - refer to and fill out
forms 14A.
3.1 Visual Check
3.1.1 Check all lines are properly connected.
3.1.2 Verify capillary is installed and clean (1 1/4" x0.10)
black, long.
3.1.3 Verify power switch and lamp operate.
3.1.4 Verify solenoid valve operation (audible).
3.1.5 Verify fan operation.
3.1.6 Check for any visual damage.
3.2 Penumatic system overhaul
3.2.1 Replace any discolored or otherwise damaged or suspect lines
(FEP teflon).
3.2.2 Replace or overhaul pump on a yearly basis.
3.2.3 Adjust pump pressure deadhead to 10 psi via the relief
pressure regulator mounted on the pump.
3.2.4 Replace the charcoal in scrubber and particulate
filter.
3.2.5 Leak test the system - see note on instrument inspection and
overhaul report form. J
3.2.6 Verify the solenoid valve operation as indicated on item 4
of the enclosed form.
Page 1 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube S0„ Calibrator
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
4.0 Rotameter Calibration
4.1 Insure that the system is leak free.
4.2 Block vent branch of outlet tee and connect the other branch to a mass
flow meter having a current calibration seal.
4.3 Read and record flow in liters per minute (£/min) for a minimum of
9 ball heights between 2 and 14.5 centimeters. (This is done for both
the steel and glass balls. Read the top of the ball. Use the attached
form. (Form 014B)
4.4 Using arithmetic graph paper, plot ball height (in centimeters) versus
measured flow (in £/min for each ball).
4.5 Connect the plotted points with a straight line, if linear, or a smooth
curve, if not linear (for each ball).
5.0 Electronics Adjustment
5.1 Verify power supply to board-top of R1 to ground is 13VDC, if not adjust
with PI.
5.2 Turn unit on and allow it to warm up for 30 minutes.
5.3 Verify the oven temperature is at 35°C ± 0.1°C with a calibrated thermistor
or thermometer, if not adjust with P-4.
5.4 Adjust meter indication with P2 and P3.
5.5 With a DMM determine the resistance of the metering circuit thermistor
when the oven is set at the proper temperature and place a sticker
indicating this value on the oven housing.
6.0 Determination of output S02 concentration
6.1 Install an NBS certified 5 cm S02 permeation tube in the oven.
6.2 From the certification documentation determine the permeation rate
(jig/min).
6.3 Using the certified permeation rate, calculate and record the expected
output of the calibrator for each ball height measured in step 4.3,
using the following equation:
Ave Perm rate
Calibrator Output _ (jug/min)
X .382 (EE»i)
Concentration (ppml
Calibrator flow @ each ball
height (m£/min)
Using all the output concentrations derived above, on semilog graph
paper plot output concentrations in ppm on the log scale versus ball
height in centimeters on the arithmetic scale.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube SO2 Calibrator
Using a french curve or a flex curve, draw a continuous curve
representative of the plotted points.
6.4 Using the curves derived in Section 6.3 determine the ball heights
that would produce the following concentrations:
0.05 ppm
0.10 ppm
0.20 ppm
0.30 ppm
0.45 ppm
and record the information on a calibration card noting the tube
serial number, date installed, and whether the ball height used for
obtaining above concentrations is the steel or the glass one.
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
INSTRUMENT INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL REPORT
Manufacturer - Thermo Electron
Instrument - Model 143 SO2 Permeation Calibrator Date:
Serial No. - Inspector:
EQB No. -
(Yes or No)
(Unless Noted)
1. Visual Check:
All lines connected
Capillary installed (1 1/4" x .010) Black, Long
Power switch and lamp operate
Solenoid valve operates (Audible)
Parcel meter lamp indicates proper Temperature (after 15 min. warmup)
Fan operating
Any visual damage
Other .
2. Replace charcoal scrubber and particulate filter
3. Pump Pressure Check (Deadhead) PSI
Adjusted to 10 PSI
Gas Leak at permeation oven cap (snoop on cap)
Gas Leak at permeation oven cap (snoop on cap)
4. Output of Zj 13.0 VDC (Top of Rj to gnd.)
Adjusted with Pj
Oven thermister resistance (with traceable lab. thermister KOHM
Readjust oven temp, with P4
Reset meter P3
30°C oven 35°C oven _____
5. Solenoid valve operation** (zero-span)
*To pressure system: Increase flow to maximum and block output and vent
ports. Balls should drop to zero (some bounce will be noted), DO NOT
PRESSURE for longer than ONE minute.
**A Rotometer or massflowmeter may be placed on the output of the solenoid
bypass charcoal scrubber. The Flow should be approx. 150-180 cc/min. with
the flow mode switch in the Zero position and Zero in the Span position.
EQB FORM 014-A
w/o pressure
w pressure*
-------
EKT
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Date: Technician:
Instrument: Type: Modal:
Mfg: Range:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Modal:
SN: Range:
Calibration Gas:
~ Mass Flowmeter
Instrument ¦«
Voltage, Vqc
Flow Rate, /min
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
15
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
1814 (4/791
-------
APPENDIX D
DATA REDUCTION SOPs
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date;
Title: Number: 015
Revision: 0
TECO 43 DATA REDUCTION AND CHECKING
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH § TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title:
TECO 43 DATA REDUCTION AND CHECKING
Page
of
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 015
Revision: 0
This SOP will be developed jointly by ERT and EQB when the one week data validation
training is completed.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 016
Revision: o
"BENDIX 8501 DATA REDUCTION AND CHECKING
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH 5 TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: BENDIX 8501 DATA REDUCTION AND CHECKING Number: 016
Revision: 0
This SOP will be developed jointly by ERT and EQB when the one week data validation
training is completed.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
:P9ge ,of
Standard Operating! Procedure Date: 3/m9
Title: .Nwnbpr: u017
Revision: 0
,;.y
DASIBI DATA REDUCTION AND CHECKING
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page of.
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: DASIBI DATA REDUCTION AND CHECKING Number: 017
Revision: 0
This SOP will be developed jointly by ERT and EQB when the one week data validation
training is completed.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
APPENDIX E
AUDITS
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date; 3/1/79
Title: Number: 018
Revision: 0
FIELD AUDIT
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/781
-------
Page 1 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: Field Audit Number: 018
Revision: 0
1.0 Purpose
1.1 Verify that applicable procedures are available, adequate, and are
being correctly utilized.
1.2 Verify that 40 CFR58 requirements are met.
1.3 Provide spot verification of instrumentation operation and calibration
status.
1.4 Provide documentation of independently verified network status.
1.5 Assess the effectiveness of data validation by the field technician.
1.6 Evaluate the equipment/shelter/grounds condition and maintenance
status.
2.0 Responsibilities
2.1 The quality assurance officer will schedule audits quarterly as
dictated by 40 CFR 58.
2.2 An auditor is required to make necessary arrangements through the
field operations department so that the proper individuals are informed.
2.3 The field operations department should make office and the field tech-
nician (s) aware of an impending audit so that time scheduling of
audited individuals can be arranged.
3.0 Preliminary
3.1 The auditor should be familiar with the data flow between the field and
the data handling department and should be familiar with the intended
end use.
3.2 The Auditor should be familiar with the operation of the sensor to be
audited and capable of manipulating test instruments in order to
assess sensor status and condition. Certification of the auditor on
the operation of the instruments and calibrators is highly recommended.
3.3 The Auditor must research the network to determine specific requirements
and applicable SOP's. He should review prior audits of the network
to determine if prior action items were attended to.
3.4 The auditor should inspect one month of data from the chosen audit
site in order to assess data quality, accuracy of data assessment,
degree of documentation, apparent time to rectify problems and
completeness of log sheets. He should discuss network data quality
and documentation with the cognizant Data Handling group leader or
analyst.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page ^ of 4
Standard Operating Procedure Datc:
Title: Field Audit Number: 018
Revision: 0
3.5 The auditor must be familiarized with the pertinent SOP's in order to
ascertain compliance with procedures by the field technician, as well
as compliance with the Quality Assurance Plan.
4.0 Methods
4.1 Checklist (EQB Form no. 018-A) may be used as a guide to indicate
pertinent areas which should be observed.
4.1.1 Shelter Exterior - Before entering the shelter to be audited,
walk around the site to ascertain the condition of the grounds,
fencing, and shelter.
4.1.2 Manifold - Observe that the intake manifold is secure and
that the inlet funnel is in place.
4.2 Inspect the shelter interior for signs of obvious problems such as
cracked or peeling floor tile and other general housekeeping. See that
any bottled pressurized gases are secured with wall mounted clamps.
4.2.1 The air conditioning unit and thermostat should be set so
that the shelter temperature is at 67° - 78°F.
4.2.2 The sampling manifold should be clean and there should be no
signs of flow restrictions in the lines on either side of the
manifold. Ascertain that air is blowing from the manifold
fan. Observe that lines between the manifold and the various
connections are stainless steel or teflon. Any unused manifold
connections should be capped. Inspect the normal sampling
line for leaks, kinks, and visible contamination and moisture.
Assure that all ports of the sampling manifold are used or
capped off. Estimate volume of the sampling manifold and
blower capacity, and if possible calculate an approximate
flow through the manifold. Include in the report a description
of the manifold and whether it meets EPA QA guidelines (EPA
Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems, Vol. II, 2.0).
4.3 List all the instrumentation equipment in the shelter by manufacturer
model and type of instrument (e.g. Meloy - SA185-2 - SO2) and serial
number (use the manufacturer's serial number rather than EQB number
if available). Determine if all air quality monitors are certified as
reference or equivalent instruments.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Field Audit
4.3.1 Check to assure that each instrument which requires a calibration
sticker has one and that it is within calibration. This
includes any test equipment used such as volt meters and
calibrators.
4.3.2 Roll back the strip charts to observe baseline and calibration
data to see that automatic zero and span data is within
limits (if auto data is available). Any anomalies should be
recorded in the REMARKS section opposite each instrument.
4.4 Check documentation to see that log sheets are properly filled and that
charts are marked. Also see that the pertinent periodic visit SOP
(such as 001) sheets are filled out. Observe that real time and strip
chart data agree, and that all pertinent SOP's for the site/ network
are available and up to date. If not, leave a copy of the SOP with the
technician. Perform a multipoint calibration of the air quality monitors
at the site using appropriate calibration data form according to 40 CFR58.
Page 3 of 4
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 018
Revision: 0
5.0 Continuous Analyzer Calibration Audit
5.1 Follow indications in 40 CFR 58. Attach the calibrator to the sample
intake port of the analyzer, including all filters and scrubbers in the
normal sample train.
5.2 Run at least 5 points indicated on 40 CFR 58 Appendix A and zero (S0?,
CO, o3).*
5.3 Calculate the percent difference between designated (audit) values and
observed values (as reported by the strip chart recorder or digital
data logger, not by direct voltage readout from the analyzer).
5.4 Analyzer shall not be recalibrated using the audit calibrator.
6.0 Audit Report
6.1 Audit report shall contain a checklist with notations made at the
site(s), the results of the audit calibration checks, an evaluation of
the overall effectiveness of the agency's data collection activities,
and an estimate of the probability of collecting "valid data," based on
factual observations.
6.2 The audit report shall contain calculations of accuracy and precision
done in accordance with Section 3, Appendix B, proposed 40CFR part 58.
6.3 Audit report shall be submitted to the agency as soon as possible
following the audit.
6.4 The original data sheets from the calibration portion of the audit will
be archived in the EQB Quality Assurance Library.
*EPA has given EQB authorization to run the Dasibi 1003 without any external
means of calibration.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
12846(12/78)
-------
Page 4 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure Datc. 3/1/79
Title: Field Audit Number: 018
Revision: 0
7.0 Evaluation
Following the audit, the results should be discussed with the technician.
He should be made aware of any corrective action items which are uncovered
as well as the positive results of the audit. The district supervisor
should be informed to discuss ways in which interaction between the technician
and the district can be improved if required. Any difficulties or positive
items should be discussed so that problem areas can be resolved and affirmative
points used in other areas of the agency.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
SOP 018
Network Station Station Number
Operator Date Time AST Shelter Temp. ?F
Note: (>/) for affimative ; (x) for negative; (N/A) for not applicable. Footnote all (x)
and explain in remarks.
SHELTER CONDITION
Exterior: Grounds 0K?D Shelter OK? [^1 Fence OK? CD Security OK? CD
Sample system OK? CD Hivol system OK?CD
Interior: A/C OK? ED and set properly? D Thermostat set at proper temp? CD
Shelter clean? D Manifold system OK?0
INSTRUMENTATION
Manufacturer /Model/Type
Serial
#
Cal Sticker
OK
B/L
OK
Previous
Span OK
Remarks
DOCUMENTATION:
Log sheets fill out?D Charts marked?CD Routine Visit SOP#( ) filled out? CD
Special maintenance performed? [ZD Spare supplies? CD
Realtime/strip chart coincide? ^D Multi-point cal OK? D Are all pertinent SOP's available? CD
EQB Form 08-A
-------
APPENDIX F
ERT QA POLICY
-------
Corporate
statement of
quality assurance
policy and
organization
EST
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC.
CONCORD. MASS. • LOS ANGELES • ATLANTA • SAN JUAN P R
FORT COLLINS. CO • WASHINGTON. O.C. • HOUSTON • CHICAGO
-------
CORPORATE STATEMENT OF QUALITY ASSURANCE POLICY AND ORGANIZATION
ccepted
Accepted ^ Title Date
President Sept. 14. 1978
Dr. Norman- E. Gaut
9r. Robert B. Harlan
Executive Vice President Sept. 14, 1978
/y s) Corporate Quality
/£> RsjCciy' Assurance Officer
Sept. 14. 1978
Dr. Edward B. Reed
Dr. Rot^ft W. Jfcmlap \
Vice President,
Environmental Engineering Sept. 14. 1978
^ _ Vice President,
Environmental Systems Sept. 14. 1978
Mr~ David Cook ^
Vice President,
Environmental Studies Sept. 14, 1978
Vice President,
_ ty/hW/r- Information Services Sept. 14. 1978
Mr. Elliot
-------
INTRODUCTION
This document defines ERT Corporate philosophy and policy on Quality Assurance
and Quality Control and provides the organization to effect this policy. ERT is dedicated to
the concept that all technical work must be accomplished in accordance with accepted
quality assurance practices. ERT assures its clients of thorough and cost-effective quality
assurance programs designed to fill specific project needs by appending quality assurance
documents of appropriate operational groups or units to this Corporate Statement of Quality
Assurance Policy and Organization when formulating project Quality Assurance Plans.
POLICY
ERT is committed to the philosophy that quality operations result from quality
planning, design, and work performance by skilled operational personnel. ERT's policy is
to perform its varied types of technical work in accordance with standard quality assurance
practices such as those defined by Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 50, Appen-
dix B, "Statement of Quality Assurance Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants and Fuel Repro-
cessing Plants" and the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency's "Quality Assurance Hand-
book for Air Pollution Measurement Systems," as appropriate. Furthermore, ERT takes
full cognizance of state and federal guidelines such as the U. S. Environmental Protection
Agency's "Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD)" to assure clients of high-quality products that are suitable to the client's needs as
defined in contracts and quality assurance plans. In lieu of specific guidelines, best scientific
judgment and engineering practices are followed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION
Synopsis
The Executive Vice President of ERT is responsible for fulfilling the Corporate
commitment to provide quality assurance to its clients. The Executive Vice President is
aided by a staff committed to quality assurance functions. This staff consists of a Corporate
Quality Assurance Officer and a Quality Assurance Directorate composed of Quality Assur-
ance Officers from each operational group. Group Quality Assurance Officers and the Cor-
porate Quality Assurance Officer report independently of operational line reporting.
-------
The Group Vice Presidents responsible for managing the Environmental Systems
Group, the Environmental Studies Group, the Information Services Group, and the Environ-
mental Engineering Group are responsible for the overall preparation and implementation
of quality assurance procedures applicable to the specific projects, functional activities for
the various operational units, and inter-group coordination. Operational unit managers are
responsible for preparation and day-to-day implementation of quality assurance procedures
applicable to their clients' specific needs. The Corporate Quality Assurance Officer is
responsible for coordinating quality assurance procedures used by operational units and
groups, and ensuring that the Quality Assurance Directorate independently audits the
performance of operational units to determine that provisions of a program's Quality
Assurance Plans are met.
Specific Organization and Responsibilities
The Quality Assurance Organization consists of a Corporate Quality Assurance
Officer, a Quality Assurance Directorate, and operational unit Quality Assurance Officers
and section Quality Assurance Officers. For quality assurance purposes, units are defined
by function, and sections are subdivisions within units. Figure 1 illustrates the relationships
of quality assurance levels.
The Corporate Quality Assurance Officer is appointed by the Executive Vice Presi-
dent. The responsibilities of the Corporate Quality Assurance Officer are:
1) to provide overall direction to, and coordination of, quality assurance proce-
dures;
2) to assign to individual members of the Quality Assurance Directorate the vari-
ous duties provided in the Corporate Statement of Quality Assurance Policy
and Organization;
3) to receive reports, independent of line report function, from unit Quality
Assurance Officers on Quality Assurance matters; and
4) to convene an annual meeting of the Corporate Quality Assurance Directorate
for the purpose of reviewing Corporate Quality Assurance performance during
the preceding 12 months and preparing a report for submittal to the Executive
Vice President.
The Corporate Quality Assurance Directorate is composed of at least one representa-
tive from each of the Corporate Operations Groups. Representatives are appointed by the
Executive Vice President. The responsibilities of the Quality Assurance Directorate are:
1) to render advice and comment to both Corporate and Operational Management
required to maintain and effect the Corporate Quality Assurance Policy;
-------
809061
-------
2) to coordinate the efforts of unit Quality Assurance Officers to effect and main-
tain their individual unit Quality Assurance programs;
3) to conduct regularly scheduled audits of the quality assurance-related func-
tions in each operational group as defined by Quality Assurance Program Plans
and implemented by the Standard Operating Procedures for particular work
tasks;
4) to advise unit Quality Assurance Officers and operational managers on proce-
dural and operational Quality Assurance requirements found deficient in
Quality Assurance audits; and
5) to sign off unit Standard Operating Procedures. Each group representative is
authorized as final sign-off personnel on Standard Operating Procedures gen-
erated vyithin and specific to his/her group.
One unit Quality Assurance Officer is appointed to each operational unit by the
Quality Assurance Directorate. The responsibilities of the unit Quality Assurance Officer
are:
1) to generate Quality Assurance Program Plans for each contract or portion of
contract for which his/her unit is responsible;
2) to ensure that necessary Standard Operating Procedures are developed and
published for all quality-related functions conducted within his/her opera-
tional unit;
3) to ensure that Standard Operating Procedures are treated as controlled docu-
ments and distributed to appropriate operational personnel;
4) to monitor and take actions required to revise the Standard Operating Proce-
dures, as well as the physical and/or data output of his/her unit, to maintain
the unit Quality Assurance Program and the quality level of the unit work; and
5) to monitor adherence to Quality Assurance Documents and safe-keeping of all
Records of Quality generated in conformance with unit Standard Operating
Procedures.
Section Quality Assurance Officers are appointed by the Quality Assurance Direc-
torate. The number of section Quality Assurance Officers will be appropriate to needs of
the unit. The responsibilities of the section Quality Assurance Officer are:
1) to assist the unit Quality Assurance Officer in preparing and updating Standard
Operating Procedures;
2) to assist the unit Quality Assurance Officer in monitoring compliance with
Standard Operating Procedures; and
3) to assist the unit Quality Assurance Officer in preparing Quality Assurance Plans.
-------
ROLE OF OPERATIONAL PERSONNEL
IN QUALITY ASSURANCE
The primary responsibility for maintaining quality of work in all areas of operation,
data handling and analysis, documentation, and physical product, remains with group and
unit operational personnel, who are responsible for:
aiding the generation of, cooperating with, and implementing the Quality
Assurance Program Plans of the contracts on which they are working;
aiding and cooperating fully with the unit and section Quality Assurance
Officers in monitoring the Quality Assurance Program Plans;
performing all work to the best standards of their personal professional capa-
bility consistent with Standard Operating Procedures;
maintaining and calibrating, as required, all measuring and/or monitoring
equipment under their control in accordance with established Standard Oper-
ating Procedures;
collecting, processing, analyzing, reporting, and preserving data consistent with
contractual requirements and Standard Operating Procedures; and
generating and maintaining all Records of Quality required by Standard Oper-
ating Procedures, contract, unit or Corporate Quality Assurance personnel.
DEVELOPMENT OF QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANS
A Quality Assurance Plan may be generated as part of a proposal or as part of a
contract. One or more ERT operational units may be involved in developing a plan or per-
forming a program contract.
When the project is completely within or under the control of one ERT operational
unit,
1) the unit Quality Assurance Officer, with the assistance of the section Quality
Assurance Officer, is responsible for developing the Quality Assurance Plan,
and
2) the group member of Quality Assurance Directorate is responsible for reviewing
and approving the Plan.
When the project requires the services of two or more ERT operational units,
1) the lead unit Quality Assurance Officer, in cooperation with Quality Assurance
Officers of other involved units, is responsible for developing the Quality Assur-
ance Plan, and
2) the Corporate Quality Assurance Officer will designate at least two members of
the Quality Assurance Directorate to review and approve the Plan.
-------
Appendix C
to the Final Report
Training Program Plan
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC.
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. COtyCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742. (617) 369-8910. 489-3750. TELEX: 923 335 ENVIRORES CNCM CABLE: ERTCON
Mr. John Hum
EPA, Region II
Air Programs Branch
26 Federal Plaza
New York, NY 10007
Dear John:
RE: USEPA-B0A #69-02-2542
Enclosed please find a copy of the finalized Training Program Plan
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board. This latest version
contains the revision associated with the EQB personnel attending our
Concord, Massachusetts facilities for the purpose of obtaining data
validation training.
Please sign this document and return it to me for inclusion in our
If you should have any questions, please do not hesitate to call
me.
REF: ERTIG-05
ERT Document No. P-7421
May 25, 1979
files.
Very truly yours
Operations Manager
International Group
AC:nlm
cc: Mr. Ralph Kirby, RTP w/out attachment
CONCORD. MA • PITTSBURGH - ATLANTA • CHICAGO • HOUSTON • FORT COLLINS. CO. • BILLINGS. MT • LOS ANGELES
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
prepared for the
PUERTO RICO ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY BOARD
by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH AND TECHNOLOGY
-TRAINING PROGRAM PLAN-
April, 1979
Project - 7421
USEPA-BOA #68-02-2542
-------
I. Introduction
This document describes the design and preparation of a training program
for the following instrumentation:
a. Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
b. Meloy Model CS-10 Permeation Tube S0_ Calibrator
c. Thermo Electron Model 143 Permeation Tube SC>2 Calibrator
d. Dasibi Model 1003 PC 0^ Monitor
e. Bendix Model 8501-SCA CO Analyzer
f. Esterline Angus MS401 Recorders
This training program has been developed by Environmental Research and
Technology (ERT) under Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) contract No. 68-02-2542
and will be presented in Puerto Rico to personnel of the Environmental Quality
Board (EQB).
The training will be divided into two phases: classroom training (approximately
seven weeks) and on-the-job training (approximately six weeks).
There will be two different classroom training programs: Level 1 and Level 2.
Level 1 will consist of training in all aspects of operations, maintenance,
calibration, troubleshooting and repairs for the instrumentation listed in above.
Level 1 training will consist of approximately three weeks of classroom training.
Personnel attending Level 1 training will be divided into two groups and two
continuous three week sessions will be held. Level 2 will consist only of the
operation and routine maintenance of the instruments listed above and classroom
training is expected to last one week.
Personnel having completed the one week Level 2 training will be expected to
be able to perform the following tasks:
1. Routine in-shelter preliminary data checks
- preliminary evaluation of data recorded since last shelter visit including
any automated zero and span checks.
-------
2. Routine instrument operational checks
- mode and status checks
3. Routine maintenance
- shelter checks
- external scrubbers
- calibration gas supply
- filters
- air conditioner status
4. Documentation
- following SOP's
- documentation of problems in log sheets
- documentation of instrument installation, removal, and repairs made
Because of the rapid pace at which this initial classroom training program
must proceed, only upon successful completion of the Level 2 training will
personnel be acceptably prepared to attend the Level 1 classroom training program.
Personnel having successfully completed the Level 1 program will have a broad
understanding of air quality monitoring principles, operation, calibration, mainten-
ance, and troubleshooting, as well as proper documentation to assure the quality
of collected data. This level will enable the person so trained to be able to
perform the following tasks:
1. Instrument Operation:
- knowledge of monitoring purpose and techniques
- field and laboratory calibrations
2. Instrument Maintenance:
- routine and preventive
- fault finding and repair
-------
3. Documentation:
- calibration and repair records
- quality control charts
- material control techniques
Personnel having completed Level 1 or Level 2 training will not be expected
to be "experts" in the covered material. The two month on-the-job training period
following formal classroom training has been designed to enhance the learning process,
enabling the instructor to continually review the covered material by arranging
for weekly half-day or full-day classroom review sessions as needed.
-------
II. Expected Level of Preparation
Given the complexity and volume of the material to be covered during the
classroom training in preparing this course, several assumptions have been made
as to the leyel of preparation and experience of the personnel attending the
training. For the purpose of determining whether the personnel attending the
training sessions meet these requirements, a pre-test will be given at the beginning
of each session. The material to be covered on each test will be as follows.
This listing is also a good indication of the level of preparation prior to training
commencement required for successful course completion.
Level 2
a. Basic arithmetic skills
- interpreting line graphs
b. Familiarity with the use of a digital multimeter (DMM)
Level 1
a. Basic algebraic skills
- solving linear one variable equations (1st and 2nd degree)
- calculating averages
- calculating percentages
- plotting graphs
- scientific notation
b. Basic electricity
- simple circuit diagrams and symbols
- knowledge of Ohms law
- oscilloscope
- digital frequency counter
- variable power supplies
-------
III. Administration
ERT will send one qualified English/Spanish speaking instructor for
the duration of the classroom training as well as one qualified English/
Spanish speaking instructor for two months to provide on-the-job training
to EQB technicians and operators.
Independent of the instrument training program, the EQB will send to
the ERT headquarters in Concord, Massachusetts a meteorologist and a data
analyst for a period of one week for the purpose of obtaining training in
all aspects of data reduction and validation procedures (as defined by
ERT since currently there is no official EPA definition of valid data).
Because of the large amount of highly technical material associated
with air quality monitoring instrumentation to be covered during the class-
room training, daily and punctual attendance to the training sessions is
highly encouraged. A daily record of classroom attendance will be kept.
The instructor would be hesitant to recommend a completion certificate to
be issued to an individual who has attended less than 80% of the training
sessions. The daily classroom sessions will be held from 8:00 to 11:30
and from 12:30 to 4:00.
Examinations or quizzes will be given regularly as shown in Figure 1.
They will serve as an evaluation of student performance and will point to
those areas in which difficulties were encountered, and the on-the-job
training will be directed to helping the EQB personnel to master them. The
test results will be averaged for both Level 1 and Level 2, the passing
grade for receiving a certificate of training for each session being 75%.
The pre-test results will not be counted for this purpose; they will only
serve as a guide for the instructor.
-------
During the two month on-the-job training program, the ERT instructor will
provide the necessary surveillance and will delegate responsibility, where
appropriate, on the operation, maintenance, calibration, and troubleshooting to
the EQB personnel.
In addition to the instrument and data validation training programs, EQB
personnel (other than those responsible for the operations) will be trained in
conducting monthly audits in accordance with 40 CFR 58, during the on-the-job
training phase.
A meeting will be held in Puerto Rico with EQB and EPA at the conclusion of
the on-the-job training portion of the training program for the purpose of
reviewing program status.
IV. Training Schedule
The training schedule is summarized in Figure 1.
-------
FIGURE 1
TRAINING SCHEDULE
Day 1
Day 2
Day 3
Day 4
Day 5
LEVEL 2
Pre-test
Introduction to
ambient air
monitoring
Concepts of
calibration
Calibrators
Meloy CS-10
TECO 143
Recorders- EA 401
quiz
TECO 43
quiz
Bendix 8501
quiz
Dasibi 1003
final exam
exam review
Day 1
Day 2
Day 3
Day 4
Day 5
Pre-test
Ambient Air
Monitoring
Calibrators
Meloy CS-10
TECO 143
Meloy CS-10
TECO 143
(lab session)
Bendix 8501
theory
Bendix 8501
Operation
overhaul
Units of
Measurement
(theory)
exam
exam review
(lab session)
Day 6
Day 7
Day 8
Day 9
Day 10
Bendix 8501
Documentation
TECO 43
TECO 43
TECO 43
LEVEL 1
exam
troubleshooting
exam review
(lab session)
Interpreting
strip charts
theory
Operation
Overhaul
(lab session)
exam
troubleshooting
exam review
(lab session)
Day 11
Day 12
Day 13
Day 14
Day 15
Dasibi 1003
theory
Dasibi 1003
Operation
Overhaul
(lab session)
Dasibi 1003
exam
troubleshooting
exam review
Multipoint
calibration
Bendix 8501
TECO 43
Review
Audit Procedures
Final exam
exam review
-------
V. Documentation
Personnel attending each level of training will receive a binder containing
the following:
- course outline
- daily schedules
- copies of all view graphs utilized in training
- outlines summarizing material covered
- reference section containing:
a) conversion tables
b) relevant formulas
c) recommended readings
These binders will help students in that they will virtually not have to copy
material covered and will be able to concentrate better in the presentation.
Support documents handed to students will include the necessary instrument
manuals, standard operating procedures (SOPs) in conformance with the most
recently applicable EPA guidelines, and testing booklets required to participate
in the training program.
-------
VI. Acceptance
This Training Program Plan has been developed by Hector R. Diaz and
Robert Ledwith of ERT.
Revised by:
Paul Filosa
Field Services § Training Manager
ERT
Date
/ ->1 r.^ #-/
-------
Appendix D
to the Final Report
Level I Training Manual
-------
TRAINING SCHEDULE
-------
TRAINING SCHEDULE
LEVEL I
DAY 1
Pre Test
Ambient Air Monitoring
Units of Measurement
DAY 2
Calibrators
Meloy CS-10
Teco 143
(Theory)
DAY 3
Meloy CS-10
Teco 143
(Lab. Session)
Exam
Exam Review
DAY 4
Bendix 8501
Theory
DAY 5
Bendix 8501
Operation
Overhaul
(Lab. Session)
DAY 6
Bendix 8501
Exam
Troubleshooting
Exam Review
(Lab. Session)
DAY 7
Documentation
Interpreting Strip Charts
DAY 8
Teco 43
Theory
DAY 9
Teco 43
Operation
Overhaul
(Lab. Session)
DAY 10
Teco 43
Exam
Troubleshooting
Exam Review
(Lab Session)
DAY 11
Dasibi 1003
Theory
DAY 12
Dasibi 1003
Operation
Overhaul
(Lab Session)
DAY 13
Dasibi 1003
Exam
Troubleshooting
Exam Review
DAY 14
Multipoint Calibrations
Bendix 8501
Teco 43
Dasibi 1003
DAY 15
Review
Audit Procedures
Final Exam
Exam Review
Daily Schedule
8:00 AM
- 10:00 AM
— Class
10:00 AM
- 10:15AM
— Break
10:15 AM
- 12:00 M
— Class
12:00 M
- 1:00 PM
— Lunch
1:00 PM
- 3:00 PM
— Class
3:00 PM
- 3:15 PM
— Break
3:15 PM
- 4:00 PM
— Class
-------
PRETEST
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING TRAINING PROGRAM
prepared for the
PUERTO RICO ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY BOARD
by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
Project No. 7421
April 1979
LEVEL I PRE-EXAMINATION
*
*
*
*
NAME:
NOTE:
This is a thirty question test.
You have one hour to complete this test.
Read each question carefully. In the case of multiple-choice questions,
you should choose the MOST correct answer.
Show all work for questions 1-5 in the space provided.
-------
Solve for x:
8x +4 = 20
x=
Solve for x:
3x2 + x + 20 = 100
Solve for x:
cx
, = d x=
ax + b
Using the equation given in Question 3 solve for x if
a = 1 x=
b = 3
c = 2
d = 1
Calculate the average of the following set of numbers
5.47 Average=
3.21
14.02
1.9
2.391
-------
Questions 6-8, given that:
The allowable limit of variation in an analyzer's span check is 200 ± 10%.
6. What are the allowable upper and lower limits?
A. ( ) 150, 250
B. ( ) 170, 230
C. ( ) 180, 220
D. ( ) 220, 200
E. ( ) 200, 220
F. ( ) None of the above.
7. By what percent is an observed value of 150 off the designated
(200) value. (Show all work.)
A. ( ) 0%
B. ( ) +10%
C. ( ) -10%
D. ( ) +25%
E. ( ) -25%
F. ( ) None of the above.
8. By what percent is an observed value of 250 off the designated
(200) value. (Show all work.)
A. ( ) 0%
B. ( ) +10%
C. ( ) -10%
D. ( ) +25%
E. ( ) -25%
F. ( ) None of the above.
9. Using the semi-log graph paper provided, plot the following data:
X
Y
3
20.1
4
54.6
5
148.4
6
403.4
2
-------
o
CO
H
10
KD
18
let
h UJ
- U)
(£
<
o *
iU
9
8
7
ac
-------
Questions 10-23:
Match the following electronic symbols with their proper names:
10. _ZYYYX— Switch
11. B. Earth Ground
—Vvv—
12. C. Diode
13. D. Bridge Rectifier
14. I E. Rotary Contact Switch
—AAAr—
15. F. Resistor
16. G. Inductor
17. - -Q- H. Potentiometer
18. ^ I. P.C. Board Ground
—or o—
19. J. Capacitor
20. K. Thermocouple
21. L. Transistor
22. ^ M. Amplifier
23. N. Chassis Ground
* 9
?4. Which of the following is OHM's law?
A. ( ) For every OHM there is an equal and opposite OHM.
B. ( ) OHMS cannot be created or destroyed by ordinary means.
C. ( ) E = I/R; where E = volts, I = current in amps,
R = resistance in OHMS.
D. ( ) OHMS are directly proportional to time and inversely
proportional to distance.
E. ( ) All of the above.
F. ( ) None of the above.
3
-------
Questions 25 and 26, given this oscilloscope display.
and given that the oscilloscope function switches are set as follows:
Horizontal display - 5 volts/division
Vertical display - 50 msec/division
25. What is the peak to peak voltage?
A. ( ) 0 VDC
B. ( ) 20 Volts
C. ( ) 10 Volts
D. ( ) 5 Volts
E. ( ) None of the above.
26. What is the frequency? (1 Hz = 1 cycle/second)
A. ( ) 50 Hz
B. ( ) 25 Hz
C. ( ) 10 Hz
D. ( ) 100 Hz
E. ( ) 4 Hz
F. ( ) None of the above.
_3
27. 1.47 x 10 is the same as:
A.
(
)
0.00147
B.
C
)
147.000
C.
(
)
000.147
D.
(
)
0.147
1,
470
is
the same
as:
A.
(
)
147.0 x
10"
B.
(
)
14.70 x
103
C.
(
)
1.470 x
10"
D.
(
)
1.470 x
103
4
-------
-3 -4
29. (1 x 10 ) (2 x 10 ) is the same as:
A. ( ) 2 x 10"12
B. ( ) 2 x 10"1
C. ( ) 2 x 10"7
D. ( ) 2 x 1012
30. In making measurements to determine pollutant concentrations
precision is gained by using more instruments of the same type to
make the measurements.
A. ( ) True
B. ( ) False
5
-------
INTRODUCTION
AMBIENT AIR MONITORING
-------
INTRODUCTION TO AMBIENT AIR MONITORING
LEVEL I
PREPARED CLASS NOTES
-------
INTRODUCTION
1.0 Introduction to Level I Training (Level II training is a pre-requisite)
An Environmental Monitoring Training Program has been developed for
the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board by Environmental Research 5
Technology, Inc. (ERT) under a contract for the Environmental Protection
Agency. The training program covers the following instrumentation:
• Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
• Meloy Model CS-10 Permeation Tube SO^ Calibrator
• Thermo Electron Model 143 Permeation Tube SO2 Calibrator
• Dasibi Model 1003 PC 0^ Monitor
• Bendix Model 8501-5CA CO Analyzer
• Esterline Angus MS401 Recorders
There will be two different classroom training programs: Level 1
and Level 2. Level 1 will consist of training in all aspects of opera-
tions, maintenance, calibration, troubleshooting, and repairs for the
instrumentation listed in above. Level 1 training will consist of
approximately three weeks of classroom training. Personnel attending
Level 1 training will be divided into two groups and two continuous
three week sessions will be held. Level 2 will consist only of the
operation and routine maintenance of the instruments listed above and
classroom training is expected to last one week.
This binder has been prepared for the Level I classroom training
and includes a course outline, outlines summarizing material covered,
copies of overhead projection transparencies used during the training,
and other reference materials.
The material in this binder is intended to help students in that
they will virtually not have to copy material covered and will be able
to concentrate better in the presentation.
Support documents handed to students will include the necessary
instrument manuals, standard operating procedures (SOPs) in conformance
with the most recently applicable EPA guidelines, and testing booklets
required to participate in the training program.
1
-------
Because of the rapid pace at which this initial classroom training
program must proceed, only upon successful completion of the Level 2
training will personnel be acceptably prepared to attend the Level 1
classroom training program. Personnel having successfully completed
the Level 1 program will have a broad understanding of air quality moni-
toring principles, operation, calibration, maintenance, and trouble-
shooting, as well as proper documentation to assure the quality of
collected data. This level will enable the person so trained to be
able to perform the following tasks:
1) Instrument Operation
• knowledge of monitoring purpose and techniques
• field and laboratory calibrations
2) Instrument Maintenance
• routine and preventive
• fault finding and repair
3) Documentation
• calibration and repair records
• quality control charts
• material control techniques
Because of the large amount of highly technical material associated
with air quality monitoring instrumentation to be covered during the
classroom training, daily and punctual attendance to the training sessions
is highly encouraged. A daily record of classroom attendance will be
kept. The instructor would be hesitant to recommend a completion cer-
tificate to be issued to an individual who has attended less than 80%
of the training sessions. The daily classroom sessions will be held
from 8:00 to 11:30 and from 12:30 to 4:00.
Examinations or quizzes will be given regularly as shown on the
schedule. They will serve as an evaluation of student performance and
will point to those areas in which difficulties were encountered and
2
-------
the on-the-job training will be directed to helping the EQB personnel
to master them. The test results will be averaged, the passing grade
for receiving a certificate of training for each session being 75%.
The pre-test results will not be counted for this purpose; they will
only serve as a guide for the instructor.
3
-------
2.0 Gas Properties - Basic Concepts*
2.1 Expression of Gas-Temperature
A. The Fahrenheit and Celsius Scales
The range of units on the Fahrenheit scale between freezing and
boiling is 180; on the Celsius or Centigrade scale, the range is 100.
Therefore, each Celsius-degree is equal to 9/5 or 1.8 Fahrenheit-
degree. The following relationships convert one scale to the other:
°F = degrees Fahrenheit.
°C = degrees Celsius or degrees Centigrade
B. Absolute Temperature
Experiments with perfect gases have shown that, under constant
pressure, for each change in Fahrenheit-degree below 32°F the volume of
gas changes 1/491.67. Similarly, for each Celsius-degree, the volume
changes 1/273.16. Therefore, if this change in volume per temperature-
degree is constant, the volume of gas would, theoretically, become zero
at 491.67 Fahrenheit-degrees below 32°F, or at a reading of -459.67°F.
On the Celsius or Centigrade scale, this condition occurs at 273.16
Celsius-degrees below 0°C, or at a temperature of -273.16°C.
Absolute temperatures determined by using Fahrenheit units are
expressed as degrees Rankine (°R); those determined by using Celsius
*This section has been adapted from Atmospheric Sampling, a course
manual prepared by the U.S. EPA Office of Manpower Development,
Institute for Air Pollution Training.
°F = 1.8°C + 32
(1-1)
°C = (°F - 32)/l.8
(1-2)
where
4
-------
units are expressed as degrees Kelvin (°K). The following relationships
convert one scale to the other:
°R = °F + 459.67 (1-3)
°K = °C + 273.16 (1-4)
The symbol "T" will be used in this outline to denote absolute
temperature and "t" will be used to indicate Fehrenheit or Celsius
degrees.
2.2 Expression of Gas Pressure
A. Definition of Pressure
A body may be subjected to three kinds of stress: shear, compression,
and tension. Fluids are unable to withstand tensile stress; hence, they
are subject to shear and compression only. Unit compressive stress in a
fluid is termed pressure and is expressed as force per unit area (e.g.,
2 2
lb^/in or psi, gm^/cm ).
Pressure is equal in all directions at a point within a volume of
fluid, and acts perpendicular to a surface.
B. Barometric Pressure
Barometric pressure and atmospheric pressure are synonymous. These
pressures are measured with a barometer and are usually expressed as
inches, or millimeters, of mercury. Standard barometric pressure is
the average atmospheric pressure at sea level, 45° north latitude at
35°F. It is equivalent to a pressure of 14.696 pounds-force per square
inch exerted at the base of a column of mercury 29.921 inches high.
Weather and altitude are responsible for barometric pressure variations.
C. Gage Pressure
Measurements of pressure by ordinary gages are indications of the
difference in pressure above, or below, that of the atmosphere surround-
ing the gage. Gage pressure, then, is ordinarily the pressure indicated
5
-------
by the gage itself. If the pressure of the system is greater than the
pressure prevailing in the atmosphere, the gage pressure is expressed
as a positive value; if smaller, the gage pressure is expressed as a
negative. The term, "vacuum," designates a negative gage pressure.
The abbreviation, "g," is used to specify a gage pressure. For
example, psig, means pounds-force per square inch gage pressure.
D. Absolute Pressure
Because gage pressure (which may be either positive or negative)
is the pressure relative to the prevailing atmospheric pressure, the
gage pressure, added algebraically to the prevailing atmospheric pressure
(which is always positive), provides a value that has a datum of "absolute
zero pressure." A pressure calculated in this manner is called "absolute
pressure." The mathematical expression is:
P . = P „ + P (2.2-1)
abs atm g
where
Pabs = absolute pressure
Patm = atra0SPheric pressure
P = gage pressure
&
The abbreviation, "a," is sometimes used to indicate that the
pressure is absolute. For example, psia, means pounds per square inch
absolute pressure. The symbol "P" by itself without the subscript "abs"
will also be used in this outline to indicate absolute pressure.
Equation 2.2-1 allows conversion of one pressure system to the
other.
E. The Concept of Pressure-Head
Pressure-head is the height of a column of fluid required to
produce a given pressure at its base. The relationship between pressure
and pressure-head is:
6
-------
P = p£ J- h (11 - 2)
where
P = pressure, force/area
p£ = density of fluid, mass/volume
2
g = local acceleration due to gravity, length/time
g = dimensional constant
c
h = pressure-head in terms of p^, length
Pressure-head may be expressed in terms of any fluid that is convenient,
e.g., Hg or H20.
F. Dalton's Law of Partial Pressure
When gases, or vapors (having no chemical interaction) are present
as a mixture in a given space, the pressure exerted by a component of
the gas-mixture at a given temperature is the same as it would exert if
it filled the whole space alone. The pressure exerted by one component
of a gas-mixture is called its partial pressure. The total pressure
of the gas-mixture is the sura of the partial pressures.
2.3 The Law of Ideal Gases
A. The Laws of Boyle and Charles
1. Bpyles' Law
Boyle's Law states that, when the temperature (T) is held constant,
the volume (V) of a given mass of a perfect gas of a given composition
varies inversely as the absolute pressure, i.e.:
V a at constant T
where
a = proportional to
7
-------
2. Charles' Law
Charles' Law states that, when the volume is held constant, the
absolute pressure of a given mass of a perfect gas of a given composi-
tion varies directly as the absolute temperature, i.e.:
P a T at constant V
B. The Law for Ideal Gases
Both Boyle's and Charles' Law are satisfied in the following
equation:
PV = 2^1 (2.3-1)
where
P = absolute pressure
V = volume of a gas
m = mass of a gas
M = molecular weight of a gas
T = absolute temperature
R = universal gas-constant
The units of R depend upon the units of measurement used in the
equation. Some useful values are:
dbf) (ft)
1. 1544
(lb -mole)( R)
2 21 83 ^n*
* (lb -mole)( R)
3. 554.6 i??
(lbm-mole)( R)
8
-------
In the above units of R:
V = ft3
m = lb
m
M = lb /lb -mole
m m
T = °R
P = lbf/ft2 for (1)
= in. Hg for (2)
= mm Hg for (3)
Any value of R can be obtained by utilizing the fact, with appro-
priate conversion factors, that there are 22.414 liters per gmm-mole
or 359 ft3 per lbm-mole at 32°F and 29.92 in. Hg.
2.4 Calculation of Apparent Molecular Weight of Gas Mixtures
Utilizing Dalton's law of partial pressure and the ideal gas law,
the following equation can be derived for calculating the apparent
molecular weight of a gas mixture:
M . = IBM (2.4-1)
mix x x v '
where
M^ix = apparent molecular weight of a gas-mixture
= proportion by volume of a gas-component
M = molecular weight of a gas component
In all other equations (except where specifically noted), the
symbol "M" will be used to denote the molecular weight of a pure gas
or a gas-mixture.
9
-------
2.5 Gas Density
Gas density can be determined by rearranging Equation 2.3-1 and
letting density P = ^
P = {pf (2.5-1)
where
p = density
P = absolute pressure
M = molecular weight
T = absolute temperature
R = universal gas constant
Another method of determining density is by utilizing the fact that
are 22.-
29.92 in. Hg.
3
there are 22.414 liters per gm-mole or 359 ft per lb^-mole at 32°F and
lb
M m
P
lb lb -mole
m m
3 3
ft ft
1 359
492°R
"fR
P in. Hg
29.92 in. Hg,
(2.5-2)
lb -mole
m
7
In this equation, M = lbm/lbm-mole, T = R°, P = in. Hg, and p = lt>m/ft .
2.6 Summary of Useful Equations
A. Temperature
F =
= 1.8°C + 32
R =
= °F + 460
K =
= °C + 273
R =
= 1.8°K
10
-------
where
°F = degrees Fahrenheit
°C = degress Centigrade or Celsius
°R = degrees Rankine
°K = degrees Kelvin
B. Pressure
P. = P. +P
abs atm g
P " pf
h
£_
*c
pf(l)hf(l) = Pf(2)hf(2)
1 std atm = 14.696 lb^/in2
2116.224 lbf/ft2
29.921 in. Hg
760 ram Hg
where
P = pressure
p = density
h = pressure head or height
g = gravitational acceleration
g = dimensional constant
c
Subscripts
abs = absolute
atm = atmosphere
11
-------
g = gage
f = fluid
C. Ideal Gas Law
PV = £ RT
M
(lb-) (ft)
R = 1544 TTT , ,B
(lbm-mole)( R)
= 21.83
(lbm-raole)( R)
_ ccA (mm Hg)(ft3)
034 (lbm-mole)(°R)
1 lb -mole = 359 ft3 at 32°F and 29.92 in. Hg
m
1 gmm-mole = 22.414 liters at 0°C and 760 mm Hg
where
P = absolute pressure
V = volume
m = mass
M = molecular weight
R = gas constant
T = absolute temperature
D. Apparent Molecular Weight
M . = 1MB
mix x x
12
-------
where
M = molecular weight
B = proportion by volume
Subscript
mix = gas mixture
x = component
E. Gas Density
P ~ DT
PM
RT
P =
lb
M
m
lb -mole
m
(359 ft )
492°
5)
P in. Hg
29.92 in. Hgl
where
p = density
P = absolute pressure
R = gas constant
T = absolute temperature
F. Viscosity, y
1 cp = 6.72 x 10
» lb
-4 m
ft sec.
G. Reynold's Number
N.
Re
L v p.
Jf
13
-------
where
NRe = Reynold's number
L = linear dimension
= D for circular pipe
= Dp for spherical particle
= D - for a rotameter
v = velocity
p£ = fluid density
= fluid viscosity
D = diameter
Dt = tube diameter
= float diameter
0^ = particle diameter
3.0 Units of Measurement*
3.1 Recommended Units^
At the present time, personnel engaged in the study of air pollution
are confronted with a multitude of confusing and conflicting units of
expression. A search through the literature has shown the wide variation
in the methods of reporting data presently in use. Many of the units
of expression are carryovers.from other fields, such as water pollution
studies and industrial hygiene surveys. While these methods of expres-
sion are not incorrect, their application to air pollution studies is
often midleading.
This outline covers the units presently being used, and those
that are recommended for the more commonly measured air pollution param-
eters.
*This section has been adapated from Atmospheric Sampling, a course
manual prepared by the U.S. EPA Office of Manpower Development,
Institute for Air Pollution Training.
14
-------
The recommended units were selected so that the reported values
would be small whole numbers in the metric system. If possible, the
reported units should be the same as those that are actually measured.
For example, weight should be reported in grams or milligrams, and
volume in cubic meters. The measured value should never be multiplied by
large numbers in order to extrapolate to extremely large areas or volumes.
If this is done, the resulting values are misleading. For example; in
order to report particulate fallout on a weight per square mile basis,
the area actually sampled, which is about 1 square foot, would have to
be extrapolated to a square mile, by multiplying the measured results
7
by a factor on the order of 10 . Reporting the results on the basis of
a square mile is misleading, because we are saying that the one square
foot that we sampled is representative of a square mile surrounding this
sampling site. This we know in most cases, is not true.
When reporting results, the type of sampling instrument should be
described, and when volumes of air are measured, the temperature and
pressure at the time of the sampling should be reported.
3.2 Particle Fallout
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Tons per square mile per month
2) Tons per square mile per year
3) Pounds per acre per month
4) Pounds per acre per year
5) Pounds per thousand square feet per month
6) Ounces per square foot per month
7) Grams per square foot per month
8) Grams per square meter per month
91 Kilograms per square kilometer per month
10) Grams per month per 4 inch or 6 inch jar
11) Milligrams per square inch per month
15
-------
B. Recommended Units
Milligrams per square centimeter per time interval as mg/sq cm/mo,
or mg/sq cm/yr.
C. Ranges Reported
0.5 to 135 mg/sq cm/mo.
3.3 Outdoor Airborne Particulate Sampling
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Milligrams per cubic meter
2) Parts per million by weight
3) Grams per cubic foot
4) Grains per cubic meter
5) Micrograms per cubic meter
6) Micrograms per cubic foot
7) Pounds per thousand cubic feet
B. Recommended Unit
Micrograms per cubic meter at +°C § p mm Hg Pressure.
C. Ranges Expected
10 to 5000 micrograms per cubic meter.
3.4 Gaseous Materials
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Milligrams per cubic meter
2) Micrograms per cubic meter
16
-------
3) Micrograms per liter
4) Parts per million by weight
5) Parts per million by volume
6) Parts per hundred million
7) Parts per billion by weight or volume
8) Ounces per cubic foot
9) Pounds per cubic foot .
10) Grams per cubic foot
11) Pounds per thousand cubic foot
B. Recommended Unit
Micrograms per cubic meter at +°C § p mm Hg Pressure
C. Ranges Reported
Depends on the specific gas.
3.5 Standard Conditions for Reporting Gas Volumes
A. Units Presently in Use
1) 760 millimeters Hg pressure and 20°C
2) 760 millimeters Hg pressure and 0°C
3) 760 millimeters Hg pressure and 65°F
4) 760 millimeters Hg pressure and 25°C
5) 700 millimeters Hg pressure and 0°C
6) 700 millimeters Hg pressure and 20°C
7) 30 inches of mercury pressure and 65°F
17
-------
B. Recommended Units
760 millimeters pressure and 25°C
3.6 Particulate Counting
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Number per cubic meter of gas
2) Number per liter of gas
3) Number per cubic centimeter of gas
4) Number per cubic foot of gas
B. Recommended Unit
Number of particles per cubic meter of gas as million particles per
cubic meter.
C. Range Reported
10 million and above particles per cubic meter
D. Particle count in Sedimentation Devices (both horizontal and
vertical)
Recommended unit:
Number of particles per square centimeter per time interval.
3.7 Temperature
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Degrees Centigrade
2) Degrees Fahrenheit
18
-------
B. Recommended Unit
Degrees Centigrade
3.8 Time
It is recommended that time be measured on the 0000 to 2400 basis
to eliminate the possibility of confusion that results from two 12
hour (a day) sections.
3.9 Pressure
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Atmospheric Pressure
a) Atmospheres
b) Millimeters of mercury
c) Inches of mercury
d) Millibars
2) Sampling Pressures
a) Millimeters of mercury
b) Inches of mercury
c) Millimeters of water
d) Inches of water
B. Recommended Unit
Millimeters of mercury
3.10 Sampling Rates
A. Units Presently in Use
1)
Cubic
meters per second
2)
Cubic
meters per minute
3)
Cubic
feet per second
4)
Cubic
feet per minute
19
-------
5) Liters per second
6) Liters per minute
7) Cubic centimeters per second
8) Cubic centimeters per minute
B. Recommended Units
1) Cubic meters per minute
2) Cubic centimeters per minute
C. Ranges Reported
Cubic centimeters per minute to 3 cubic meters per minute.
The selection of cubic meters, or cubic centimeters will depend
on the sampling equipment used, and the units chosen should give small
whole numbers.
3.11 Visibility
A. Units Presently in Use
1) Miles and fractions of a mile
2) Kilometers and fractions of kilometers
B. Recommended Unit
Kilometers
3.12 Summary of Recommended Units
Particle Fallout - Milligrams per square centimeter per time interval.
i
Outdoor Airborne Particulates - Micrograms per cubic meter at +°C § p mm
Hg pressure.
Gaseous Material - Micrograms per Cubic meter at +°C 5 p mm Hg pressure.
20
-------
Gas Volumes - reported at 760 millimeters Hg pressure and 25°C.
Particulate Counting - Number per cubic meter.
Particle Count on Sedimentation Devices - Number of particles per square
centimeter per time interval.
Temperature - Centigrade scale.
Time - 0000 to 2400 hours per day.
Pressure - Millimeters of mercury.
Sampling Rates - Cubic meters, or cubic centimeters per minute.
Visibility - Kilometers
It is believed that adoption and use of the recommended units of
expression will result in more uniform reporting, and will remove much
of the confusion that is now found in reports of air pollution.
21
-------
PERMEATION TUBE
SO* CALIBRATORS
-------
PERMEATION TUBE S02 CALIBRATORS
PREPARED CLASS NOTES
Part I Introduction
Part II Thermo Electron Model 143
Part III Meloy Model CS-10
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The quality assurance requirements for State and Local Air Monitoring
Stations (SLAMS) and Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) air
monitoring mandate that continuous S02 analyzers be periodically zeroed,
span checked, calibrated, and audited.
The use of permeation tubes to generate calibration SO2 gas mixtures
is widely used. The National Bureau of Standards (NBS) has developed
and made available SC>2 permeation tubes. These are regarded as Standard
Reference Materials (SRM's) and are considered primary standards.
SO2 permeation tubes consist of FEP Teflon tubing that contain
liquified SO2, hermetically sealed under its own pressure. These tubes
are plugged with a section of Teflon rod, charged with liquefied SO2,
and sealed. Collars of inert metal are used to reinforce the end
seals.*
The sealed gas permeates through the tube's walls and evaporates
from the outer surface at a constant rate if the tube is held at a
constant temperature. The process is highly temperature sensitive;
therefore the temperature must be controlled with iQ.l°C. Known con-
centrations of SO2 may be prepared by passing a known flow of clean dry
air over the permeation device.
1F. P. Scarignelli, A. E. O'Keefe, E. Rosenberg, J. P. Bell, Analytical
Chemistry, Vol 42, No. 8, July 1970.
-------
2. PERMEATION TUBE CALIBRATORS
2.1 Objective:
• The objective is to produce a gaseous sample with a known
concentration of SO2. The concentration should be within
the range of whatever S02 analyzer that is to be calibrated/
audited and should also meet minimum flow requirement of the
analyzer.
• Since the permeation device gives off SO2 at a constant rate,
the S02 can be diluted in a calibrated clean, dry flow of
air to produce the required concentrations:
r R K
" Q
o
where
C = SO2 concentration in ppm (vol)
R = certified permeation rate in ng/min
K =0.382 ppm SO2 (from diluting lng SO2 in one liter of air)
(K = constant for specific permeant)
Qq = flow rate of gas, m£/min
2.2 Requirements:
• Permeation tube, NBS calibrated with permeation rate specified
in ng/min at a given temperature.
• Calibrator should have permeation oven that can be kept at
specified temperature +0.1°C. This requires the following
electronics:
a. Control circuit - heater
b. Feedback circuit
• Calibrator should have provision for scrubbing utilized air
so that it is free of particulates, S02, and humidity.
-------
• Calibrator should have calibrated flow metering and control
pneumatics.
-------
7904010 71104011
Electronics
To Maintain Oven
Temperature
to within ±0.1°C
Pump
CONCEPTUAL PERMEATION TUBE CALIBRATOR
-------
EKT
Date: _
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Technician:
Instrument: Type: Modal:
Mfq: Range:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Modal:
SN: Range:
Calibration Gas:
~ Mass Flowmeter
Instrument <
Voltage, Vqc
Flow Rate, /min
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
15
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
1814 (4/79)
-------
Instrument Model Mfg SN EQBSN
Rotameter Calibration (Range) Date
-------
7904006
DETERMINATION OF S02 CONCENTRATION
(CALIBRATOR OUTPUT)
RK
C - S02 CONCENTRATION IN PPM (VOLUME)
R = PERMEATION RATE IN NG/MIN (AT SPECIFIED TEMPERATURE ± 0.1 °C)
K = 0.382 ppm S02 - m A /ng S02 (K = CONSTANT FOR SPECIFIC PERMEANT)
Q = FLOW RATE OF GAS IN m I /MIN
-------
Instrument Model SN EQBSN.
Permeation Tube SN.
Date
[S02]
ppm
Ball Height in cm
EFT
-------
3. THE THERMO ELECTRON MODEL 143 PERMEATION TUBE CALIBRATOR
(See the following attachments)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure _ 7/1/,„
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 014
Revision: 0
EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the
Teco 143 Multipoint Permeation Tube
SO2 Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube S02 Calibrator
1.0 Applicability
This SOP applies to the laboratory overhaul, checkout, and calibration
of the TECO 143 Multipoint Permeation Tube Calibrators used in the
EQB network for calibrating S02 analyzers.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent).
Thermistor or thermometer calibrated to 35°C ± 0.1°C (NBS traceable).
Leak Checker.
Mass flow meter (Hastings or equivalent) range 0 to 15 £/min (NBS traceable).
Teco 143 manual.
Pressure gauge.
3.0 Preliminary checks, and pneumatic overhaul - refer to and fill out
forms 14A.
3.1 Visual Check
3.1.1 Check all lines are properly connected.
3.1.2 Verify capillary is installed and clean (1 1/4" x0.10)
black, long.
3.1.3 Verify power switch and lamp operate.
3.1.4 Verify solenoid valve operation (audible).
3.1.5 Verify fan operation.
3.1.6 Check for any visual damage.
3.2 Penumatic system overhaul
3.2.1 Replace any discolored or otherwise damaged or suspect lines
(FEP teflon).
3.2.2 Replace or overhaul pump on a yearly basis.
3.2.3 Adjust pump pressure deadhead to 10 psi via the relief
pressure regulator mounted on the pump.
3.2.4 Replace the charcoal in scrubber and particulate
filter.
3.2.5 Leak test the system - see note on instrument inspection and
overhaul report form.
3.2.6 Verify the solenoid valve operation as indicated on item 4
of the enclosed form.
Page 1 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143 Number: 014
Multipoint Permeation Tube SO^ Calibrator Revision: 0
4.0 Rotameter Calibration
4.1 Insure that the system is leak free.
4.2 Block vent branch of outlet tee and connect the other branch to a mass
flow meter having a current calibration seal.
4.3 Read and record flow in liters per minute (£/min) for a minimum of
9 ball heights between 2 and 14.5 centimeters. (This is done for both
the steel and glass balls. Read the top of the ball. Use the attached
form. (Form 014B)
4.4 Using arithmetic graph paper, plot ball height (in centimeters) versus
measured flow (in £/min for each ball).
4.5 Connect the plotted points with a straight line, if linear, or a smooth
curve, if not linear (for each ball).
5.0 Electronics Adjustment
5.1 Verify power supply to board-top of R1 to ground is 13VDC, if not adjust
with PI.
5.2 Turn unit on and allow it to warm up for 30 minutes.
5.3 Verify the oven temperature is at 35°C ± 0.1°C with a calibrated thermistor
or thermometer, if not adjust with P-4.
5.4 Adjust meter indication with P2 and P3.
5.5 With a DMM determine the resistance of the metering circuit thermistor
when the oven is set at the proper temperature and place a sticker
indicating this value on the oven housing.
6.0 Determination of output S02 concentration
6.1 Install an NBS certified 5 cm SO2 permeation tube in the oven.
6.2 From the certification documentation determine the permeation rate
(yg/min).
6.3 Using the certified permeation rate, calculate and record the expected
output of the calibrator for each ball height measured in step 4.3,
using the following equation:
Ave Perm rate x 3g2 .pprnfl-.
Calibrator Output _ (iig/min) yg
Concentration (ppm) a tun
Calibrator flow @ each ball
height (m£/min)
Using all the output concentrations derived above, on semilog graph
paper plot output concentrations in ppm on the log scale versus ball
height in centimeters on the arithmetic scale.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube Sf^ Calibrator
Using a french curve or a flex curve, draw a continuous curve
representative of the plotted points.
6.4 Using the curves derived in Section 6.3 determine the ball heights
that would produce the following concentrations:
0.05 ppm
0.10 ppm
0.20 ppm
0.30 ppm
0.45 ppm
and record the information on a calibration card noting the tube
serial number, date installed, and whether the ball height used for
obtaining above concentrations is the steel or the glass one.
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
INSTRUMENT INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL REPORT
Manufacturer - Thermo Electron
Instrument - Model 143 SO2 Permeation Calibrator Date:
Serial No. - Inspector:
EQB No. -
(Yes or No)
(Unless Noted)
1. Visual Check:
All lines connected
Capillary installed (1 1/4" x .010) Black, Long
Power switch and lamp operate
Solenoid valve operates (Audible)
Panel meter lamp indicates proper Temperature (after 15 min. warmup)
Fan operating
Any visual damage
Other .
2. Replace charcoal scrubber and particulate filter
3. Pump Pressure Check (Deadhead) PSI
Adjusted to 10 PSI
Gas Leak at permeation oven cap (snoop on cap) w/o pressure
Gas Leak at permeation oven cap (snoop on cap) w pressure*
4. Output of 13.0 VDC (Top of Rj to gnd.)
Adjusted with P^
Oven thermister resistance (with traceable lab. thermister KOHM
Readjust oven temp, with P4
Reset meter P3
30°C oven 35°C oven
5. Solenoid valve operation** (zero-span)
*To pressure system: Increase flow to maximum and block output and vent
ports. Balls should drop to zero (some bounce will be noted), DO NOT
PRESSURE for longer than ONE minute.
**A Rotometer or massflowmeter may be placed on the output of the solenoid
bypass charcoal scrubber. The Flow should be approx. 150-180 cc/min. with
the flow mode switch in the Zero position and Zero in the Span position.
EQB FORM 014-A
-------
EQB
Date:
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Technician:
Instrument: Type: Model:
Mfq: Range:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Model:
SN: Range:
Calibration Gaa:
~ Mass Flowmeter
Instrument <
Voltage, Vqc
Flow Rate, /min
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
15
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
Form 014-B
-------
7903147 7903148
Clean S02 Free Air Regulated to 10 psig
— Differential Pressure Regulator
FMi — Flowmeter/Rotometer
MV-] — Manual Needle Valve
Dirty Room Air at Atmospheric Pressure to
Clean Room Air at approximately 17 psig
Fi — Balston Particulate Filter, Type 90/Grade C
P^ — Thomas Single Sided Pump
Internal
Vent
FM1
I
T
Ri
Brominated/lodated
Active Charcoal
Scrubber
¦{Sj-
I
I
I
4-
MVi
Permeation
Tube Oven
Capillary
.010" Internal Diameter
1J4" Length
NOi
r
2
C Sample In
(Optional)
(Optional)-1
-O Output
External
Vent
NO
COM
SV,
NC
Internal
r > Vent
m. Brominated/lodated
'A Active Charcoal
Scrubber
?
Clean Room Air Regulated to 10 psig.
RVi — Backpressure Regulator
(Relief Valve)
SVi — 3-Way Solenoid Valve
Output — Bulkhead Fitting Connected to
Span Port of Analyzer
Vent — Bulkhead Fitting Connected to
Atmospheric Pressure Exhaust Manifold
Thermo Electron Model 143 Permeation Tube Calibrator
Schematic of Flow System
EST
-------
7909139 7903151
Temperature Control P.C. Board
A1B|C|D|E1F|H|J|K1L|M|N|P|R|S|T1U| VlVVlXlYlZ"
I
>JL J
Triad 68x
for 220v only
Thermo Electron Model 143 Permeation Tube Calibrator
Electrical Schematic
-------
7«jn-i nn«t
TE 143
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
PC BOARD
Notes:
1. For 35°C Tsmp. R8 =
R11 = 6.19K 1%
6.19 K
For 30°C Temp. RS = 7.60 K
R11 =7.50K 1%
Denotes Pin Outs
-------
4. THE MELOY CS-10 MULTIPOINT SC>2 CALIBRATOR
(See the following attachments)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure _.
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 013
Revision: 0
EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of
the Meloy CS-10 Multipoint SO2 Permeation Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 1 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Meloy CS-10 Number: gi3
Multipoint SC^ Permeation Calibrator Revision: q
1.0 Applicability
This SOP applies to the laboratory overhaul, checkout, and calibration
of the Meloy CS-10 Multipoint Permeation Tube Calibrators used in the EQB
network for calibrating SO2 analyzers.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent).
Thermistor or thermometer calibrated to 43°C ± 0.1°C (NBS traceable).
Leak Checker.
Mass flow meter (Hastings or equivalent) range 0 to 15 £/min (NBS traceable).
Meloy CS-10 manual.
Pressure gauge.
3.0 Preliminary checks, and pneumatic overhaul - refer to and fill out
forms 013A.
3.1 Visual Check
3.1.1 Check all lines are properly connected.
3.1.2 Verify capillary is installed and clean (thin metal tubing,
see manual).
3.1.3 Verify power switch and lamp operate.
3.1.4 Verify fan operation.
3.1.5 Check for any visual damage.
3.2 Penumatic system overhaul
3.2.1 Replace any discolored or otherwise damaged or suspect lines
(TFE teflon).
3.2.2 Replace or overhaul pump on a yearly basis.
3.2.3 Adjust pump pressure deadhead to 10 psi via the pressure
regulator.
3.2.4 Replace the charcoal in scrubber and particulate filter
cartridges.
3.2.4 Leak test the system - see note on instrument inspection and
overhaul report form.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12A78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Meloy CS-]0
Multipoint SO^ Permeation Calibrator
4.0 Rotameter Calibration
4.1 Insure that the system is leak free.
4.2 Block vent branch of outlet tee and connect the other branch to a mass
flow meter having a current calibration seal.
4.3 Read and record flow in liters per minute (H/min) for a minimum of 9
ball heights between 2 and 14.5 centimeters. (This is done for both
the steel and glass balls. Read the middle of the ball. Use the
attached form. (Form 013B)
4.4 Using arithmetic graph paper, plot ball height (in centimeters) versus
measured flow (in £/min for each ball).
4.5 Connect the plotted points with a straight line, if linear, or a smooth
curve, if not linear (for each ball).
5.0 Electronics Adjustment
5.1 Turn unit on and allow it to warm up for 30 minutes.
5.2 Verify the oven temperature is at 43°C ± 0.1°C with a calibrated
thermistor or thermometer; if not, adjust with variable resistor on
board.
5.3 "Verify front panel light is flashing when oven is operating at proper
temperature.
6.0 Determination of output SO^ concentration
6.1 Install an NBS traceable certified 1 cm SC^ permeation tube in the
oven.
6.2 From the certification documentation determine the permeation rate
(jig/min).
6.3 Using the certified permeation rate, calculate and record the expected
output of the calibrator for each ball height measured in step 4.3,
using the following equation:
Ave Perm rate y R_ .ppmiL
Calibrator Output _ (yg/min) ^g '
Concentration (ppm) r . . .. . , , . ..
rr Calibrator flow @ each ball
height (ml/min)
Using all the output concentrations derived above, on semilog graph
paper, plot1output concentrations in ppm on the log scale versus ball
height in centimeters on the arithmetic scale.
Page 2 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 013
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Meloy CS-10
Multipoint S02 Permeation Calibrator
Using a french curve or a flex curve, draw a continuous curve
representative of the plotted points.
6.4 Using the curves derived in Section 6.3 determine the ball heights
that would produce the following concentrations:
0.05 ppm
0.10 ppm
0.20 ppm
0.30 ppm
0.45 ppm
and record the information on a calibration card noting the tube
serial number, date installed, and whether the ball height used for
obtaining above concentrations is the steel or the glass one.
Page 3 of '
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 013
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
INSTRUMENT INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL REPORT
Manufacturer - Meloy
Instrument - Model CS10 SO2 Permeation Calibrator
Serial No.
Date:
Inspector:
EQB No.
(Yes or No)
(Unless Noted)
1. Visual Check:
All lines connected
Capillary installed
Power switch and lamp operate
Flashing lamp indicates proper Temperature (after 15 min. warmup)
Fan operating
Any visual damage
Other
2. Replace charcoal scrubber and particulate filter canisters
3. Pump Pressure Check (Deadhead) PSI
Adjusted to 10.0 PSI
Leak check. Increase flow to maximum and block output port. Balls
should drop to zero (some bounce will be noted).
Oven thermister resistance (with traceable lab. thermistor) KOHM
Readjust oven temp, with P6
Reset meter P3
30°C oven 35°C oven 43°C oven (check)
EQB Form 013A
-------
EQB
Date:
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Technician:
Instrument: Type: Modal:
Mfg: Range:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Model: ....
SN: Range:
Calibration Gan:
~ Mass Flowmeter
Instrument ¦<
Voltage, Vqc
Flow Rate, /min
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
15
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
Form013-B
-------
7401WI
MELOY CS-10 WIRING DIAGRAM
Pump Fan
o o
TB1
Fuse
2% A
H
115 vAC
50/60 Hz
A1
S00Q213-1
J1
250
25 W
: R1
vvvwvi^
Heater
10
11
«r
i0
Thermistor
Heat Exchanger
S>
DS1 ( ) Lamp
:R2
:30K yh W
TBI
EFT
-------
MELOY CS-10
TEMPERATURE CONTROL PC BOARD
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
2
-------
7904001
MELOY CS-10
TEMPERATURE CONTROL PC BOARD
COMPONENT SIDE
-------
BENDIX CO ANALYZER
MODEL 8501-5CA
-------
BENDIX MODEL 8501-5CA CO MONITOR
Prepared Class Notes
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The method used in the Bendix for carbon monoxide (CO) detection is
infrared light absorption. A single infrared light beam is alternately
modulated between a sample and reference (CO free) cells. An infrared
light detector coupled to the sample and reference cells exhibits a
capacitance change proportional to the amount of CO present in the
sample cell. The principle of measurement is based on CO having a known
characteristic absorption spectra in the infrared range.
1.2 The relationship of detection is as follows:
where
C is capacitance change
c is CO concentration
1 is cuvette length
1.3 Converting the change in capacitance in the detection chamber to an
output usable for a recorder requires the use of electronic circuitry
and the associated plumbing to condition the sample prior to injection
into the sample cell of the detector. For the purpose of calibrating,
the analyzer plumbing is also required for injecting zero and span
gases.
1.4 This analyzer, like most others, can be subdivided into three
systems:
a) pneumatics
b) optics
c) electronics
-------
7903200
BENDIX CO ANALYZER
Relationship between capacitance change
and CO concentration:
AC~1-e"Acl
where:
C is capacitance change
c is CO concentration
1 is cuvette length
-------
1.5 Basic Infrared Absorption Gas Analyzer Technique optical bench
(see Figure 7-5 in manual) consists of:
• infrared light source
• absorption cell of certain pathlength
• detector
1.5.1 Sample air is passed through the absorption cell. CO
absorbs (or attenuates) the light and thus the reduction in light is
a quantitative measure of the CO present in the sample,
1.5.2 In order to determine how much CO is present in the sample,
there is a constant referencing against a reference cell filled with a
nonabsorbing (CO free) gas (nitrogen). The detector will produce a
change in capacitance if there is an imbalance between the sample and
reference chambers (if CO is present in the sample).
-------
2. THE BENDIX 8501-5CA SYSTEM
2.1 Pneumatics (see Figure 7-4 in manual)
2.1.1 All sample lines are 1/4 in. Teflon.
2.1.2 Eight-micron filter - the 8-micron filter is a Balston paper
filter located on the rear of the unit. It is used to remove any
particulate matter larger than 8 microns and to trap any condensates.
Dirt in the filter can restrict flow. It should be replaced as specified
in the SOP.
2.1.3 Sample pump - the pump is a Metal Bellows model MB-21
and is used to pressurize the sample to make it flow in and put of the
detection chamber.
2.1.4 Pressure relief regulator - the sample flow not required
by the analyzer is bypassed by the pressure relief valve to the SAMPLE
BYPASS bulkhead connector. The backpressure is indicated by the 0-30 psi
pressure gauge. Normally the backpressure is 8 psi (normal operation
in SAMPLE mode).
2.1.5 Mode selector valve - manual valve for switching input into
detection chamber.
2.1.6 0.3 micron gas filter - gas filter located at front panel
to prevent particulates from getting into optics.
2.1.7 Flow adjust needle valve and meter - to monitor and adjust
flow within operating parameters of analyzer.
2.2 Optics (refer to Figure 7-5 and Section 4.3 in manual)
2.2.1 Optical bench consists of head assembly, analysis chamber,
and detection chamber. There are two types of optical benches:
• "old units" - these have silver colored benches
• "new units" - these have gold colored benches
-------
TMSISt 7905198
Sample
Inlet
Span
Gas."
In
Flow
Adjust
Needle
Valve
Bendix 8501-SCA Carbon Monoxide Analyzer
How Diagram
-------
2.2.2 Head assembly contains the infrared light source and the
chopper motor drive:
• The light source can be repositioned so that the same amount
of light passes through both the sample and reference cells.
• The chopper motor alternately "switches" the light source
between the sample and reference cells.
2.2.3 Analysis chamber:
• Sampled gas flows at constant rate through sample cell.
• Reference cell is filled and sealed with reference gas (nitrogen).
2.2.4 Detection chamber (following is a simplified explanation -
refer to manual for details):
t The detection chamber is filled with a gas that absorbs infrared
radiation and converts it to energy in the form of pressure
(the effect is equal to heating a gas in a closed container).
This pressure causes a piston-like diaphragm (which is actually
one side of a capacitor) to move. This movement causes the
capacitance value of the capacitor to change.
• The detection chamber is alternately "looking" at the reference
and sample chambers.
If the sample contains no CO, the light coming from either
cell will have the same intensity of IR radiation, thus
the variable capacitor will have a constant capacitance
which is equated to zero CO concentration.
If the sample contains CO, some of the IR radiation
energy is absorbed before it reaches the detector and
this will be reflected by a proportional movement of
the variable capacitor.
-------
INFRARED LIGHT
SOURCE
CHOPPER
WINDOW
SAMPLE IN
CO MOLECULES
IN AIR
SAMPLE CELL
SAMPLE OUT
WINDOW
NITROGEN MOLECULES
REFERENCE CELL
CAPACITOR
DIAPHRAGM
BENDIX CO MONITOR MODEL 8501-5CA
SIMPLIFIED CO DETECTION SYSTEM
-------
DETECTOR CELL SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM
CHOPPER DRIVE
MOTOR
HEAD ASSEMBLY
RADIATION
SOURCE
SAMPLE IN
ANALYSIS
CHAMBER
SAMPLE CELL
SAMPLE OUT
BEAM COMBINER
FRONT
MEASURING CHAMBER
DETECTION CHAMBER
REAR
MEASURING CHAMBER
DIAPHRAGM OF
CAPACITOR
6
31
WsL
I
PICK OFF COIL
MAGNET
ROTATING
CHOPPER
REFERENCE CELL
(Filled and Sealed
- with Reference Gas)
WATER REJECTION
FILTER
-ELECTRICAL SIGNAL
OUTPUT
-------
BENDIX CO MONITOR MODEL 8501-5CA
DETECTOR CELL
SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM
SAMPLE OUT
WATER REJECTION
FILTER
BEAM COMBINER
FRONT
MEASURING CHAMBER
DIAPHRAGM OF
CAPACITOR
DETECTION CHAMBER
REAR
MEASURING CHAMBER
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL OUTPUT
-------
• The in and out movement of the detector's piston-capacitor
plate due to changing pressure in the detector causes a
continuous capacitance change. The movement of the capacitor
plate can be expressed as a sine wave because of the continuous
change from exposure to sample and reference cells. The
capacitance change occurs at the same frequency as the chopper
switches the light from one cell to the other (6.2 Hz).
2.3 Electronics (for complete details see Section 4.4 of manual)
2.3.1 Analyzer card can be subdivided into 11 functional circuits:
• power supply
• 300 KHz oscillator
• capacity to voltage converter
• low pass filter
• amplifier
• unity gain inverter
• chopper reference signal shaper
• synchronous demodulator
• linearizer
• chopper motor driver
• temperature control
2.3.2 Power Supply:
• ±15 VDC for signal processing electronics
• +8 VDC for infrared source
2.3.3 300 KHz Oscillator provides carrier frequency for capacitance
to voltage converter.
-------
2.3.4 Capacitance to Voltage Converter in conjunction with the
variable capacitance in the detector cell acts as an amplitude modulator.
2.3.5 Low Pass Filter removes 300 KHz carrier from output signal
of capacitance to voltage converter.
2.3.6 Amplifier provides required signal gain.
2.3.7 Unity Gain Inverter inverts signal so that it (along with
the noninverted signal) reaches the synchronous demodulator.
2.3.8 Chopper Reference Signal Shaper senses the chopper action in
optical bench head assembly and triggers the synchronous demodulator so
that the signals coming into it become fullwave rectified.
2.3.9 Synchronous Demodulator fullwave rectifies the incoming
signal.
2.3.10 Linearizer compensates for non-linearity inherent in measure-
ments at high CO concentrations.
2.3.11 Chopper Motor Driver drives motor of the chopper in head
assembly of the optical bench so that light is alternated between sample
and reference cells at a 6.2 Hz rate.
2.3.12 Temperature Control Circuit maintains interior temperature
of the analyzer at 50°C.
2.3.13 Control Card contains zero and span trim pots, a range
change amplifier, and a filter circuit which adds a time constant which
filters out noise in the operation.
-------
7905X01
6.2 Hz
Head Assembly
Detector
Cell
s
<3
•
"q.
E
C
I
cc
I
Detection
Chamber
Interconnection Legend
V
+15 V
-15V
6.2 Hz
—' 1—1 1—
Chopper Motor
Driver
I.R. Source
Power Supply
6.2 Hz Signal
Capacitance
Change
6.2 Hz Signal
Capacitance
to Voltage
Converter
Amplitude
Modulated
300 KHz Carrier
300 KHz Carrier
300 KHz
Oscillator
300 KHz
± ±
I X
Low Pass
Filter
Chopper
Reference
Signal Shaper
Amplified 6.2 Hz
Signal
Temperature
Probe
(§x
j—MS/VN—1_
Temperature
Control
Circuit
Heater
Bendlx 8501-6CA CO Analyzer
Electronic Signal Processing
Block Function Diagram
R2
R1 [-VAn Gain = R2/R1
6.2 Hz j^r>L
6.2 Hz Signal
Noise and
Carrier Filtered
Out
| Coarse Span |
^ —NN\H"
6.2 Hz to trigger
Demodulator
6.2 Hz Signal
norn
Full Wave
Rectified
(Demodulated)
fa
Analyzer Card
-------
7905052
+15V
CR3
cr4
tp2
OUTPUT
BENDIX CO MONITOR MODEL 8501-5CA
SIMPLIFIED CAPACITY TO
VOLTAGE CONVERTER
SCHEMATIC
-------
SIMPLIFIED SYNCHRONOUS
DEMODULATOR
SCHEMATIC
Switching
Field Effect
Transistors
Original Signal
Triggering Signal
r\
Halfwave Rectified
Signal
Summing Point
Fullwave
Rectified
Signal
Original Signal
Inverted
Halfwave Rectified
Signal
-------
SYNCHRONOUS DEMODULATOR
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC
BENDIX 8501-5CA
CO ANALYZER
©1—^ I ©
© ©^
-------
3. SETUP/START-UP - INITIAL TURN ON
3.1 Supporting Materials
• Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent)
• Oscilloscope
• Laboratory calibration system (span gas dilution system or
bottled CO in required concentrations, Z-l air)
• 8501-5CA manual
3.2 Pre-Start Up
3.2.1 Put the instrument on the bench.
3.2.2 Remove the instrument's two front covers, thus exposing the
internal components.
3.2.3 Check for possible damage during shipment, i.e., loose pc
board, etc..
3.2.4 Slide out optical bench drawer and inspect for visible
damage.
3.2.5 Inspect all the tubing connections, ensure that they are
leak tight.
3.2.6 Remove all foreign material from the instrument.
3.2.7 Replace input sample filter and gas filter (semiannually).
3.3 Start Up Inspection Procedure
3.3.1 Install the analyzer in the rack with covers off.
3.3.2 Connect laboratory zero air or external calibrator zero air
to the analyzer sample port.
-------
3.3.3 Connect external calibration source of CO at a 1,000 ppm
concentration (use highest concentration available up to 1,000 ppm
CO if 1,000 ppm concentration is not available).
3.3.4 Connect the recorder output to a 0-10 V recorder and a DVM.
3.3.5 Verify that the front panel power switch (in range selector)
and pump switch are in off position.
3.3.6 Plug the instrument power cord to 115 V power outlet (grounded).
3.3.7 Turn the pump switch on.
3.3.8 Inspect the pump for proper operation, refer to manual
Section 5.2.3.
3.4 Adjustment
3.4.1 Turn the instrument on and allow it to stabilize for 8 hours
(a minimum of 2 hours) prior to proceeding with adjustment procedures.
3.4.2 Slide the optical bench drawer forward on its track.
3.4.3 Refer to the enclosed "Bendix 8501-5CA Infrared CO Analyzer
Adjustment Checklist." Put zero and span pots in the 500 position.
3.4.3.1 Check ±15 VDC Analyzer Cord power supply.
3.4.3.2 Check the +8 VDC IR Source power supply.
3.4.3.3 Check the output of the chopper motor driving circuit.
3.4.3.4 Check the output of the 300 KHz oscillator.
3.4.3.5 Check chopper motor drive reference signal (at R-58).
3.4.3.6 Check output of the Chopper Reference Signal Shaper.
-------
3.4.3.7 Adjust C-7. Refer to Section 5.5.1 of the manual but
do not span and zero instrument until the following adjustments are
completed.
3.4.3.8 Adjust zero balance of the optical system. Refer to
Section 5.5.2 of the manual. Do not span and zero the instrument until
the following adjustments are completed.
3.4.3.9 Adjust the phasing adjustment of the optical bench.
Refer to Section 5.5.3 of the manual. In addition to monitoring TP6 for
a maximum negative voltage as indicated in the manual, connect an
oscilloscope to the cathode of CR-7. Proper phasing has been achieved
when the observed waveform is like an inverted greek letter omega (\j-).
3.4.3.10 Zero the instrument following the procedure in
Section 3.3.1 of the manual.
3.4.3.11 Span the instrument following the procedure in
Section 3.3.2 of the manual. Use span gas concentration near 40 ppm.
Note: During operation maintain flow at a ball height of 3 cm. In
sample mode back pressure should be about 8 psi.
-------
7903199
Bendix 8501-5CA Infrared CO Analyzer
Adjustment Checklist
Test Point
Designated Value
Observed
Most Probable Malfunction Cause
— See Manual —
Remedial
Action
Analyzer Card
+15 (Note 2)
+15 ± .03 volts
Analyzer Card Power Supply
A
-15 (Note 2)
-15 ± .03 volts
Analyzer Card Power Supply
A
TP10 (Note 2)
+8.0 ± .1 volts
IR Source Power Supply
A
TP9D (Note 3)
24 ± volt peak-to-peak square wave at 62 ± 3 Hz rate
Chopper Drive Circuit
A
T3 Terminal 7 (Note 3)
110 ± 5.5 volts peak-to-peak sine wave at 300 ± 30 kHz rate
300 KHz Oscillator
A
R58 (Note 3)
Approximately 150 millivolts peak-to-peak triangular waveform
Chopper Motor
A
TP7 (Note 3)
0 to -12 volt square wave at a 6.2 Hz rate
Chopper Motor Reference Signal Shaper
A
TP2 (Note 2)
0 ± 10 millivolts
C-7 Adjustment
B
TP6 (Notes 2 and 4)
0 ± 50 millivolts
Zero Balance Adjustment
C
TP6 (Notes 2 and 5f
- 6.93 volts
Phasing Adjustment
D
TP9 (Notes 2 and 5)
-8.0 volts
Linearizer Circuit
A
TP5 (Notes 3 and 5)
Approximately 6 volts peak-to-peak triangular wave
Amplifier Circuit
A
at a 6.2 Hz rate
Control Card
+10 volts
TP13 (Notes 2 and 5)
A
TP14 (Notes 2 and 5)
+10 volts
A
Notes: 1. Ail measurements referenced to common unless otherwise noted.
2. Measured with a high imput impedance voltmeter of 1 % accuracy.
3. Measured with an oscilloscope.
4. Measurement performed with zero gas injected into instrument.
5. Measurement performed with span gas of 1000 ppm CO concentration
injected into the instrument. With lower ppm span gases, the output
will be proportionately lower.
Remedial Action Key:
A. Replace board.
B. Adjust C-7, refer to manual section 5.5.1.
C. Adjust zero balance of optical bench, refer to section 5.5.2.
D. Correct phasing adjustment, refer to section 5.5.3.
-------
BENDIX 8S01-6CA CO ANALYZER
ANALYZER CARD TEST POINTS
ERT
-------
TECO SO* ANALYZER
MODEL 43
-------
THERMO ELECTRON MODEL 43
PULSED FLUORESCENT S02 ANALYZER
Prepared Class Notes
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Sulfur dioxide, which is one of the products of combustion of most
organic fuels, is generally considered to be one of the largest pollu-
tants discharged into the atmosphere by man. Because of this, ambient
air monitoring programs almost always require that the concentration
of this material be determined. Many of the instruments in use today
for the monitoring of sulfur dioxide suffer from several shortcomings.
First generation instrumentation, employing automated wet chemical
procedures, suffer from interferences by other pollutants such as ozone.
Additionally, an inordinate amount of time and manpower is required to
maintain them in operating condition. Newer techniques, generally
considered as second generation analyzers, tend to be non-specific to
sulfur dioxide, require complex flow and temperature control, and require
support equipment such as hydrogen cylinders or generators.
Thermo Electron's patented (#3,845,309) Pulsed Fluorescent concept
is generally considered as the first third generation ambient sulfur
dioxide analyzer.
1.2 The following equations describe the fluorescence phenomenon:
SO^ + hVj
S02 * hv2
where:
SO2 - Sulfur Dioxide
S02* - electronically excited S02
hVj - ultraviolet radiation, 230-190 nm wavelength
hv2 - fluorescence
-------
(1) S02 + hvj -*¦ S02*
(2) S02* -* S02 + hv2
S02 — Sulfur Dioxide
S02* — Electronically Excited S02
hv-j — Ultraviolet Radiation, 230-190 nm Wavelength
hv2 — Fluorescence
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Theory of Operation
EFT
i
h
-------
1.3 The method used in the TECO for sulfur dioxide (SC^) detection is
Pulsed Fluorescence. A gas sample is submitted to a source of pulsed
ultraviolet illumination through a monochromatic filter (narrow bandpass).
SO2 molecules, energized by the high intensity pulsed light source,
emit an SC^ specific illumination which, through a second narrow band
filter, impinges upon the sensitive surface of a photomultiplier tube.
The emitted light is linearly proportional to the concentration of SC^
molecules in the sample. Electronic, solid state amplification of the
output of the photomultiplier tube and signal conditioning for the
elimination of signal noise, provide a meter reading and an electronic
analog signal for recorder output.
-------
7903139 790SHI « 7903UI
Ultraviolet
_ ... Interference
Combining Fj(ter
Lens jf
agg
Pulsating
Ultraviolet
Light
Sample
Gas Out
Sample
Gas In
Reaction
Chamber
Optical
Filter
Photomultiplier
Tube
Negative DC
j—1 Vol lay e
Electronics
Current Output
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Principle of Operation
-------
2. THE PULSED FLUORESCENT SYSTEM
The basic hardware of the Pulsed Flurorescent SC^ analyzer can be
classified into three (3) sections: pneumatics, optics, and electronics.
2.1 Pneumatics
2.1.1 The pneumatics section is concerned with the transport of
the gases into and out of the instrument to achieve an accurate analysis
of the sample gas.
2.1.2 There are three inlet ports at the rear of the instrument:
s;ample, span and zero. Flow into the instrument is determined by a
front panel selector switch. In the sample mode, both the sample valve
and the zero valve are de-energized, thus allowing gas to be drawn
through the sample port. Moving the front panel switch to zero or span
causes gas to be drawn into the zero and span ports respectively.
The flow is then directed to the tube side of a permeation drying
device. This device removes water vapor from the gas stream while
leaving the S02 concentration uneffected. It operates on a selective
permeation principle, allowing only water molecules to pass through the
teflon-like membrane. The driving force for water removal is a differential
partial pressure of water across the membrane. This is obtained within the-
instrument by taking the dried air, reducing its pressure across a
capillary and feeding it into the shell side of the dryer. Since the
membrane is just a transfer medium, it never needs to be replaced because
of water saturation. The dryer should give many years of acceptable
performance within the instrument.
Exiting the tube side of the dryer, the sample flows through a
pressure-reducing capillary which provides the reduced pressure
necessary for the operation of the permeation dryer. The sample is
then directed through the aromatic hydrocarbon cutter, which removes the
effect of these hydrocarbons on the fluorescent measurement, and then
the fluorescent chamber where it undergoes analysis.
-------
7903143 7903144 7903143
MB-41 Pump
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Gas Flow Schematic
EST
-------
79CH06j
PERMA PURE DRYER
UTILIZING PERMEATION DISTILLATION DRYING TECHNIQUE
HIGH PRESSURE
WET FEED INLET
(AT ATMOSPHERIC
PRESSURE FROM
SOLENOID VALVE
MATRIX)
LOW PRESSURE WET PURGE GAS OUTLET
SHELL HEADER
z:
PERMEABLE TUBE BUNDLE
IS
IES3
*
r
HIGH PRESSURE
DRY PRODUCT
OUTLET
CAPILLARY
LOW PRESSURE
DRY PURGE GAS
INLET (FROM
CAPILLARY AT
- 10 IN. Hg. VACUUM)
-------
2.1.3 The fluorescent principle for SC^ detection is insensitive
to flow. A reading on the flowmeter between 1 and 4 SCFH is satisfactory.
However, the response time of the measurement is a function of sample
flow; the higher the flow the faster the response.
2.1.4 A vacuum regulator, in conjunction with the sample pump,
controls the absolute pressure in the system.
2.1.5 All sample lines are constructed of FEP Teflon.
2.1.6 Sample flow is approximately 1.3 liters/min.
2.2 Optics
2.2.1 The original ultraviolet interference filter had a bandwidth
of 2300 A _ 1900 A (230 nm - 190 nm). The latest filters, (July 1978 to
O
present) have a spike bandwidth of 2200 A (220 nm).
2.2.2 Optical Filter - bandwidth is proprietary information.
2.2.3 Photomultiplier Tube - RCA 4501-V12, Cathode blue sensitivity,
nonstandard, specially selected tube.
2.3 Electronics
2.3.1 The electronics section has two main areas of interest: the
pulsed ultraviolet light source and the signal processing electronics.
2.3.2 Several major reasons why the UV lamp is operated in the
pulsed mode.
2.3.3 UV Flash Lamp - 12-18 month life, under slight positive
pressure. Quartz window, glass envelope. Pulsed at 10 hertz rate.
2.3.4 Pulsed photon energy from the fluorescing S02 is detected by
a photomultiplier tube where it is converted into a current flow. A
preamplifier/bandpass filter integrates the current into a voltage wave-
form. From here the signal is connected to an electronic gate which is
switched synchronously with the flashing lamp energy pulses. The signal
-------
is then filtered to screen out high frequency noise, using an adjustable
time response filter before going to the PPM meter and the recorder
output. The output voltage can be selected from a voltage divider chain
on an output printed circuit board. For calibration, the high voltage
to the PMT or the gain of the final amplifier is adjusted until the
instrument agrees with a known concentration of SO^.
-------
79031M ™:jr»
790M5'>
uv
Flash Lamp
Power Supply
Timing
Circuits
UV
Interference
Fitter
UV
Flash
Lamp
SO2
Reaction
Chamber
PMT
lOptical
Filter
Range
Switch
Current
High
Voltage
Power Supply
Analog Panel
Meter
Pre
Variable
Gate
Output
amp
^
Voltage
Gain amp
amp
Voltage
Divider
Strip
Chart
Recorder
±15vDC
Power
Supply
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Electronic Block Diagram
-------
THERMO ELECTRON MODEL 43 PULSED FLUORESCENT S02 ANALYZER
ULTRAVIOLET LITE PAC ASSY
* Voltage level dependent on revision of lite pac.
-------
THERMO ELECTRON MODEL 43 PULSED FLUORESCENT S02 ANALYZER
ULTRAVIOLET LITE PAC SCHEMATIC
Discrete Component Type
* (Whara all tha wir*s ara approx. tht aama thleknaaa.)
PinVotagas
Pin
Voitaga
3
4 260a 10 VDC
4
~ 530*20 VDC
6
~ 1000 *38 VDC
Pin Votogas
Printed Circuit Board Type
* (Whara tha Black ft Rad wlra* ara much thick ar than tha Whlta b Brown wlrat.)
Pin
Voitaga
t
~ 219 a 10 VDC
4
4 4S2a20 VDC
•
~ 1000a X VDC
Blua A T3 Black
Black / / Blk
C24
022 1&Pf
IN4007
-W-W-W-1
CM -L D21 023
y^f TIN4007 IN4007
1600V/77
TecoType
f—UV—vvwH
rh M7
' ' ' 4MI 1IU1
Pin Voltagaa
Pin
Voltaga
3
+ 160*10 VDC
4
~ 300 c 20 VDC
6
+1000* 38 VDC
• (Whara only thraa wiraa ara UMd.)
-------
3. PERFORMANCE
3.1 The United States Environmental Protection Agency has set up a test
procedure for automated air pollution analyzers in order to test their
performance and determine their consistency relationship to a standard
reference method. This equivalency procedure consists of two main tests.
3.1.1 The first is concerned with the performance of the instrument.
The performance parameters tested are as follows:
1) Range: The range of the instrument in parts per million must
be defined.
2) Noise: The noise from the instrument is defined as one
standard deviation around a mean reading at 0% of scale and
at 80% of scale.
3) Lower Detectable Limit: This is defined as twice the noise
level.
4) Interference Equivalent: The interference equivalent for
single chemical species and the total interference equivalent
are specified. Interference equivalent is determined by
testing the analyzer for response to substances other than
that measured by the instrument.
5) Zero Drift: The zero drift for 12 and 24 hours has to be
specified.
6) Span Drift: The span drift at 80% of full-scale range and at
20% of full-scale range must be determined.
7) Lag Time: The lag time in minutes must be determined.
8) Rise Time: The rise time for the instrument to 95% of
full-scale must be specified.
9) Fall Time: The fall time to 95% of final reading must be
specified.
10) Precision: The precision at 20% of the full-scale and at 80%
of the full-scale range must be determined. Precision is
defined as a one standard deviation around a given concentration.
-------
The Thermo Electron Model 43 Fluorescent SO^ Analyzer had been
tested in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency procedures
for performance.
3.1.2 The second portion of the Equivalency Testing procedure is
to determine if the instrument demonstrates a consistent relationship
with the Federal Reference procedure for monitoring SC^. The Federal
method for measuring SO^ is the P-rosaniline method. Both 24-hour
continuous tests and one-hour continuous tests are required to show
consistency. The 24-hour tests are conducted at low concentrations
(0.02-0.05 ppm); medium concentrations (0.10-0.15 ppm) and high concen-
trations (0.40-0.50 ppm). The one-hour tests are all performed at the
high concentration level. The test involves measuring ambient air spiked
with the above level concentrations to determine if the instrument agrees
with the Reference method.
3.1.3 The Model 43 demonstrated a consistent relationship with the
EPA's Reference method for SC^. Equivalent designation was granted
(EQSA-0276-0009).
-------
4. SET UP STARTUP PROCEDURES
(Refer to Manual Sections II, III, and
-------
5. LEAK CHECK PROCEDURE
5.1 Determination for presence of external leaks in the gas flow system.
Equipment required:
1) 9/16 inch open end wrench
2) Three 1/4 inch O.D. tubing end caps
3) Flowmeter, 0-200 cc/min or similar range
4) Approximately six inches of 1/4 inch O.D. tubing
5.1.1 Turn instrument power off.
5.1.2 Remove all lines from bulkhead fittings on rear panel of
instrument.
5.1.3 Cap the sample, span and zero inlet ports with 1/4 inch
stainless steel end caps. Properly tighten caps.
5.1.4 Turn instrument power on.
5.1.5 Slowly increase the vacuum reading on the sample vacuum
guage by adjusting the vacuum regulator clockwise. Continue doing so
until a maximum vacuum reading is obtained. The maximum reading should
be between -15 and -16 inches of mercury. A maximum vacuum reading less
than -12 inches of mercury could indicate sample pump inefficiency.
5.1.6 Let instrument stabilize for one minute. (Note that the
ball in the sample flowmeter is slowly descending to 0 SCFH.)
5.1.7 The ball in the sample flowmeter should now be sitting on
the bottom of the flowmeter. Because this flowmeter is so coarse
(0-10 SCFH), this would only indicate that there are no major leaks in
the analyzer.
5.1.8 Turn instrument power off.
5.1.9 Remove cover from analyzer.
-------
5.1.10 Disconnect the FEP Teflon tubing from the rear, top port of
the Perma Pure Dryer at the sample vacuum regulator. Install the
0-200 cm/min flowmeter inline by connecting the just loosened line to
the bottom (input) port of the flowmeter. Connect the six inch piece
of tubing to the top (output) fitting of the flowmeter. Complete the
installation by connecting the remaining end of the six inch piece of
tubing to the sample vacuum regulator fitting.
5.1.11 Turn instrument power on.
5.1.12 Repeat step 5.1.6.
5.1.13 The ball in the 0-200 cc/min flowmeter should now be sitting
at the bottom of the flowmeter. This would indicate that there are no
external leaks in the analyzer.
5.1.14 Turn instrument power off.
5.1.15 Remove 0-200 cc/min flowmeter from instrument and re-connect
plumbing to original configuration.
5.1.16 Remove end caps from the sample, span, and zero input ports.
5.2 Determination for presence of internal leaks across the ports of
the sample and span/zero solenoid valves.
5.2.1 With the 6 inch piece of tubing still connected to the top
(output) fitting of the 0-200 cc/min flowmeter, connect the other end
of the piece of tubing to the "sample" inlet port on the instrument's
rear panel.
5.2.2 Turn instrument power on.
5.2.3 Adjust sample vacuum regulator for a reading of -10 in. Hg.
on the vacuum gauge.
5.2.4 Turn input mode switch to "sample" position. (Note ball in
0-200 cc/min flowmeter should now be pegged at the top of the scale.)
-------
5.2.5 Alternately turn the input mode switch to the "span" and
"zero" positions. Note that the 0-200 cc/min flowmeter ball will drop
and sit at the bottom of the scale indicating that there is no flow into
the "sample" port while the instrument is in the "span" or "zero" modes.
5.2.6 Remove flowmeter from "sample" port and connect to "zero"
port.
5.2.7 Alternately turn the input mode switch to the "span" and
"sample" positions. Note that the 0-200 cc/min flowmeter ball will
drop and sit at the bottom of the scale indicating that there is no
flow into the "zero" port while the instrument is in the "sample" or
"span" modes.
5.2.8 Remove flowmeter from "zero" port and connect to "span" port.
5.2.9 Alternately turn the input mode switch to the "zero" and
"sample" positions. Note that the 0-200 cc/min flowmeter ball will drop
and sit at the bottom of the scale indicating that there is no flow into
the "span" port while the instrument is in the "sample" or "zero" modes.
-------
DASIBI Os ANALYZER
MODEL 1003 PC
-------
DASIBI MODEL 1003PC
OZONE ANALYZER
PREPARED CLASS NOTES
-------
DASIBI MODEL 1003-PC OZONE MONITOR
Prepared Class Notes
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The method used in the Dasibi for ozone (O^) detection is light
absorption. Because of the particular structure of the 0^ molecule, it
will absorb light energy at and about the wavelength of 254 nanometers
(nm) [long ultraviolet (UV) region]. No other molecule normally found
in ambient air will absorb as much light energy at this frequency as 0^
1.2 Beer-Lambert Law
I = I. exp (- LC)
out in r x '
I = Light Intensity Out
1^ = Light Intensity In
X = Absorption Coefficient
L = Path Length
C = Concentration
1.3
| VARIABLES
DEPENDENT
Light Intensity
Pressure
Temperature
Concentration
Path Length
1.4 Basic UV Photometer Technique
Measuring cell consists of:
• UV source 254 nm
• Absorption cell of certain path length
• Detector
1 CONSTANT
INDEPENDENT
Flow Absorption Coefficient
-------
1.4.1 Sample air is passed through the absorption cell. Ozone
attenuates the light. The reduction in light is a
quantitative measure of the 0^ present in the sample.
1.4.2 Questions
• How much light did we start with?
• How much light is lost in the cell with no 0^ present?
o How can one tell zero concentration of 0^ if some absorption
takes place with no 0^ present?
• What happens when the light source changes intensity?
• What happens if the detector's sensitivity changes?
1.4.3 Conditions for Using UV Photometry
• An air sample with a zero 0^ concentration.
• An air sample identical to the first in its light absorbing
properties except for the unknown 0^ concentration.
• A LA/ light source of known wavelength and fixed intensity.
• A stable detector.
• A known and fixed path length.
• The value of X, the absorption coefficient at the wavelength
being used.
• Standard pressure and temperature reference.
-------
BEER-LAMBERT LAW
BASIC EQUATION
l|N x LIGHT INTENSITY IN
l0UT= LIGHT INTENSITY OUT
X = ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT
L = PATH LENGTH
C = CONCENTRATION
-------
7902051 7S
Control
Detector
Quartz t t Quartz
Window L Window Sample
\ / Detector
rr
¦» czz^tp ¦;;; - •.; ¦'0UT I I
'• Ahenrntinn f
uv
Light
Source
f
Absorption
Cell
BASIC UV PHOTOMETER TECHNIQUE
-------
CONDITIONS FOR USING UV PHOTOMETRY
1) AN AIR SAMPLE WITH A ZERO OZONE CONCENTRATION
2) AN AIR SAMPLE IDENTICAL TO THE FIRST IN ITS LIGHT
ABSORBING PROPERTIES EXCEPT FOR THE UNKNOWN
OZONE CONCENTRATION
3) AN UV LIGHT SOURCE OF KNOWN WAVELENGTH AND
FIXED INTENSITY
4) A STABLE DETECTOR
5) A KNOWN AND FIXED PATH LENGTH
6) THE VALUE OF X. THE ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT AT THE
WAVELENGTH BEING USED
7) STANDARD PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE REFERENCE
e>
¥1
i
ERT
-------
2. THE DASIBI SYSTEM
2.1 Pneumatics
2.1.1 Sample Inlet Teflon Filter - if used
• should be changed before filter looks dirty,
• dirt in filter can reduce measured 0^, and
• dirt can restrict flow:
Instrument is not flow-sensitive as long as it is used in
the 1 to 3.5 liter per minute (1pm) range.
The 1 liter limitation is to ensure proper purging of the
absorption cell. The 3.5 liter limitation is to ensure
100% scrubber efficiency.
2.1.2 Scrubber - Made of copper screen mesh and coated with manganese
dioxide (MnC^) It is not consumed in removing 0^ (catalytic reduction),
but dirt will reduce its efficiency. For the analyzer to give accurate
readings, it has to remove all of the 0^ (100% efficiency).
2.1.3 Gas Switch - Teflon 3-way valve
2.1.4 Absorption Cell - Kynar coated. Path length is 71 centimeters
(cm)
2.1.5 Pump - Capable of approximately 5 1pm at ambient pressure
2.1.6 Flowmeter - To monitor and adjust flow within operating
parameters of analyzer.
2.2 Optics
2.2.1 UV source - Low pressure cold cathode mercury vapor lamp.
92% of its output is at 254 nm. It has a Vycor sheath (or second envelope)
that prevents the shorter UV wavelengths from being emitted. (185 nm
wavelength is optimum for generating 0^!)
-------
2.2.2 71-cm folded absorption cell - absorption tubes have Kynar
coating. Two quartz mirrors are used.
2.2.3 Detectors - Cesium telluride vacuum diodes. Their passband
is centered near 254 nm. With the light source and detectors taken
together, 99% of the system response is due to 254 nm light. Therefore,
the system is monochromatic. The detectors are "solar blind." They
will not respond to ambient light (sunlight or fluorescent).
2.3 Daisibi System: Electronics
2.3.1 Detectors
• Dark current is insignificant as used in this instrument.
• Biasing [150 nano-ampere (nA) sample detector]
(400 nA reference detector)
• Output is direct current and proportional to light intensity
2.3.2 Electrometers - current-to-frequency converters
2.3.3 Integrators (on logic board)
• Up-down counters
• Pulse counters or totalizers
• Averages - They act as a time constant
• Allow for precise light measurement in instrument
2.3.4 Zero Detector (on logic board)
Provides an output when the count in the control integrator equals
zero.
2.3.5 Auto Span Comparator (on logic board)
Provides an output when the count in the sample electrometer
equals the preset span number.
-------
2.3.6 Control and Timing Board
• Controls the solenoid valve.
• Starts and stops the sample (up count) and control (down
count)
2.3.7 Memory (on logic board)
Stores the information provided by the sample integrator for
display on the front panel.
2.3.8 Digital Display (on logic board)
Converts the binary coded signal in the memory to a numeric dis-
play. It is a gas-planar discharge system and requires approximately
200 VDC to operate it.
2.3.9 Digital to Analog (D/A) Converter Board
Converts the binary coded digital signal in the memory to an
analog voltage (0-10 VDC).
2.3.10 Analog Output (on D/A Board)
Buffers (isolates) the D/A converter from an accidental overload or
short circuit in the recorder or whatever is connected to its output.
2.3.11 Power Supply Board
Supplies +5 V, ±15 V, +24 V, and +200 V to instrument from 115 VAC.
Also supplies UV lamp; 1,400 V initial, 200 to 400 V after ignition.
2.3.12 Heater Control (on Power Supply Board)
Supplies power to UV tube housing. Regulates temperature to
approximately 36°C.
-------
7QA90S1
/suzuji ... 79020267902030
UV
Light
Source
Selective
3as Filter
Control
Detector
Control
Electrometer
Control
Integrator
I
Zero.
Detector
Cease
Negative
Integration
Control
and
Timing
Start Positive Integration (Up Count)
Start Negative Integration (Down Count)
I
r
Solenoid
Valve
Quartz
Window Sample
Detector
Absorption »
Cell
OUT
Sample
Electrometer
fs
Sample
Integrator
W
s
Flowmeter
Sample Gas
Exhaust
Auto Span
Comparator
Sample
Pump
D/A Converter
Memory
Sample
Inlet
Analog
Output
I
Data
Digital
Display
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
DASIBI OZONE ANALYZER
MODEL 1003 PC
Cease
Positive
Integration
-------
3. THEORY OF OPERATION (Also see manual, pp. 17-21)
3.1 Sample Interval Sequence
3.1.1 4 Seconds
Purge system. Flow is through scrubber for zero 0^ in absorption
tubes. Sample and control integrators reset to zero.
3.1.2 7 Seconds
Sample and control integrators start counting up. The count
continues until the sample integrator reaches the preset span number
and stops both counters. The control integrator now contains a number
that represents the light intensity during this first half of the
cycle.
3.1.3 4 Seconds
Purge system. Flow bypasses scrubber. Ozone to be measured is now
in the absorption tubes.
3.1.4 7 Seconds
Sample and control integrators start counting down from the numbers
stored in them on the up count. The count continues until the control
integrator reaches zero. The count remaining in the sample integrator
is a measure of the 0^ in the absorption tubes.
3.2 Operating Frequencies for Sample and Control Integrators
3.2.1 The display on the front panel is equal to 1/10,000 of the
actual frequency when the function switch is in the sample or control
frequency positions.
3.2.2 Normal operating range for the sample frequency is 35.0 to
48.0 on the display [350 kilohertz (kHz) to 480 kHz].
-------
3.2.3 The normal operating range for the control frequency is 23.0
to 28.0 on the display (230 kHz to 280 kHz).
3.2.4 The frequencies generated are in direct proportion with the
light being received at the detectors.
-------
DASIB11003 SAMPLE INTERVAL SEQUENCE
4 SECONDS — PURGE SYSTEM. FLOW IS THROUGH
SCRUBBER FOR ZERO OZONE IN ABSORPTION
TUBES. SAMPLE AND CONTROL
INTEGRATORS RESET TO ZERO.
7SECONDS — SAMPLE AND CONTROL INTEGRATORS START
COUNTING UP. THE COUNT CONTINUES
UNTIL THE SAMPLE INTEGRATOR REACHES
THE PRESET SPAN NUMBER AND STOPS
BOTH COUNTERS. THE CONTROL
INTEGRATOR NOW CONTAINS A NUMBER
WHICH REPRESENTS THE LAMP INTENSITY
DURING THIS FIRST HALF OF THE CYCLE.
-------
DASIB11003 SAMPLE INTERVAL SEQUENCE
(CONTINUED)
4 SECONDS — PURGE SYSTEM. FLOW BYPASSES
SCRUBBER. OZONE TO BE MEASURED
IS NOW IN THE ABSORPTION TUBES.
7 SECONDS - SAMPLE AND CONTROL INTEGRATORS
START COUNTING DOWN FROM THE
NUMBERS STORED IN THEM ON THE UP
COUNT. THE COUNT CONTINUES UNTIL
THE CONTROL INTEGRATOR REACHES ZERO.
THE COUNT REMAINING IN THE SAMPLE
INTEGRATOR IS A MEASURE OF THE OZONE
IN THE ABSORPTION TUBES.
-------
4. SET UP/START UP - INTITAL TURN ON
4.1 Sample connection - 1/4-inch Teflon (as short as is practical).
4.2 Connect 115 VAC / 60 Hz at 125 watts
4.3 Connect 0-10 VDC recorder
4.4 Check to see that all printed circuit boards are seated properly.
4.5 Turn power switch on. Display lights, pump starts, and valve
cycles every 10 to 15 seconds.
4.6 Measure power supply voltages on mother board:
+5 VDC ±0.25 V
+15 VDC ±0.75 V
+24 VDC ±1.2 V
+200 VDC ±20 V
4.7 Cycle time adjust. Check cycle time by observing each time the LED
in the upper left hand corner of the display flashes. It should be more
than 20 seconds and less than 30 seconds. If necessary, adjust R8 on
the timing circuit board.
4.8 Allow instrument to warm up for 30 minutes. Measure temperature
control voltage on motherboard at the "temp" test point.
2.9 VDC ± .2 V (old style)
4.4 VDC ± .2 V (new style)
4.9 Adjust analog zero by connecting digital voltmeter (DVM) to recorder
output terminals. Put mode selector switch in zero. Adjust recorder
output with R3 on D/A board.
4.10 Move mode switch to Span. ^The first three digits of the display
should agree with the first three span set switches. Connect DVM to
recorder terminals. Voltage displayed on DVM should be the same as the
last three digits on the analyzer display. (Example: span reading is
54.950. DVM should read 9.50 V ± .IV.)
-------
4.11 Move mode switch to Sample Frequency. Reading should be between
35.0 and 48.0. If it is too high, adjust UV lamp. If it is too low,
clean optics. If it is still too low after the optics have been cleaned,
adjust the UV lamp. If the reading is too low after UV lamp has been
adjusted, the lamp should be replaced.
4.12 Move mode switch to Control Frequency. Reading should be between
23.0 and 28.0. If it is either too high or too low, adjust control
detector.
4.13 Move mode switch to Operate. Disconnect power to valve and sample
pump. Make sure the zero offset swtich is at the zero position. Dis-
connect the three jumpers on the logic board.
4.14 Observe the following sequence on the display
(1) Resets to zero and pauses.
(2) Counts up to the preset span number and pauses.
(3) Counts down to some number close to .050 and pauses.
4.15 Allow the analyzer to complete several cycles. The displayed
number should not change more than ±2 digits. Find the average of the
cycles (e.g., .049, .047, .046, .050, .049 = .048).
4.16 Subtract .050 from the average, (e.g., .048 - .050 + - .002).
This is the analyzer zero offset. In this case, it is -.002 parts per
million (ppm).
4.17 Reconnect power to sample pump and valve
4.18 System Leak Check
Remove the sample line from the rear fitting and hold your finger
over the fitting opening. The flow, as indicated on the rotameter,
should drop to zero. If it does not, there is a leak in the system
that must be closed off.
-------
4.19 Solenoid Valve Leak Check
Remove the scrubber. Block the ell connector on the side of the
solenoid where the scrubber was connected (use your finger). Watch the
flowmeter and notice that the flow drops to zero for half of the measure-
ment cycle and returns to its original flow for the other half.
Now block the tee on the other side of the solenoid where the other
side of the scrubber is connected and, at the same time, block the sample
inlet connector. Again, the flow should drop to zero for half of the
measurement cycle and return to its original flow for the other half.
4.20 Scrubber Efficiency Check
Turn on the 0^ source and adjust it until the monitor reads between
0.5 and 1.0 ppm. The ozonator need not be stabilized for this test so
there is no need to wait for the source to warm up. Once the instrument
is reading 0^, switch the mode switch to SAMPLE FREQ. Record at least
five consecutive readings in order to find a good average. After the
last reading, switch the ozonator off, but leave the air flow on and
take five more readings. Average these five readings and subtract the
first average from the number just obtained. If you did not notice any
drift in the frequency while you were recording the numbers, then the
difference between the two averages represents how much 0^ is contained
in the reference (zero) gas.
4.21 Light Absorption Check
Put instrument in OPERATE mode and remove the three jumpers on the
logic board. Remove the tubing from the exit port of the absorption
tubes (the top one). Prepare a small diameter wire by straightening out
one end of a paper clip. Observe that the display will reset to zero,
then count up to 54.950, and then count down to some number near 00.050.
Wait until the up count is completed. In the pause before the down
count starts, insert the paper clip into the light path through the exit
port of the absorption cell. After the down count is completed, the
-------
display should read significantly higher than before. Allow the paper
clip to remain in the light path. The next complete cycle of the Dasibi
will ignore the presence of the paper clip and the reading will return
to 00.050. This means that the instrument has compensated for the
blockage of light by the paper clip.
4.22 Zero Offset Procedure
(See SOP 008.)
-------
Appendix E
to the Final Report
Level II Training Manual
-------
TRAINING SCHEDULE
-------
TRAINING SCHEDULE
LEVEL II
DAY 1
DAY 2
DAY 3
DAY 4
DAY 5
Pre Test
Calibrators
Teco 43
Bendix 8301
Dasibi 1003
Introduction to ambient
Meloy CS-10
air monitoring
Teco 143
Quiz
Quiz
Final Exam
Concepts of Calibration
Recorders
Exam Review
EA401
Quiz
Daily Schedule
8:00 AM - 10:00 AM - Class
10:00 AM - 10:15 AM - Break
10:15 AM - 12:00 M - Class
12:00 M - 1:00 PM - Lunch
1:00 PM - 3:00 PM - Class
3:00 PM ^ 3:15 PM - Break
3:15 PM — 4:00 PM — Class
-------
PRETEST
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING TRAINING PROGRAM
prepared for the
PUERTO RICX) ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY BOARD
by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH 8c TECHNOLOGY, INC.
Project No. 7421
April 1979
LEVEL n PRE-EXAMINATION
NOTE:
* This is a thirty question test.
* You have one hour to complete this test.
* Read each question carefully. In the case of multiple-choice questions,
you should choose the MOST correct answer.
NAME:
-------
1. Calculate the average of the following numbers:
25 Average =
50
75
100
50
Questions 2-7:
Round off the following numbers to two decimal places:
2. 0.037
3. 0.4124
4. 2.57599
5. 2.57501
6. 9.3
7. 0.45
One
millivolt is the same as
A.
( ) 1000 Volts
B.
( ) 10 Volts
C.
( ) 0.01 Volts
D.
( ) 0.001 Volts
E.
( ) None of the above
One
megohm is the same as:
A.
( ) 100 ohms
B.
( ) 106 ohms
C.
( ) 0.001 ohms
D.
( ) 1000 ohms
E.
( ) 102 ohms
F.
None of the above
10. When measuring a voltage at a test point in an instrument the manual
calls for a 100 ± 10 VDC. The actual reading is 112 VDC. Would you
suspect a problem?
(yes or no - explain briefly)
1
-------
Questions 11-13:
If you are going to check whether there is electricity at a typical
wall outlet:
11. You would set your meter to the:
A. ( ) DC mode
B. ( ) AC mode
C. ( ) Electricity mode
12. You would select the following function:
A. ( ) Ohms
B. ( ) .Volts
C. ( ) Amps
13. You would select the following range:
A. ( ) 0-2
B. ( ) 0-20
C. ( ) 0-200
D. ( ) 0-2000
E. ( ) None of the above
14. In handling a 10,000 ohm resistor care should be taken so as not to
be shocked by the high ohms load.
A.
(
)
True
B.
(
)
False
A
volt
is
a measure of:
A.
(
)
Electrical resistance
B.
(
)
Electrical pressure
C.
(
)
Flow of electrons
D.
(
)
None of the above
Questions 16 and 17:
Using the rotometer calibration graph provided:
16. What is the flow rate at a ball height of 4 centimeters?
17. What ball height is required to provide 3.5 liters per
minute flow rate?
2
-------
Rotameter Calibration
Ball Height
(Graph for Questions 16 and 17)
-------
Questions 18-24:
Given that the allowable limit of variation in an analyzer's span
check is 200 ± 10% - Are the values listed below within these limits?
Observed Value Okay?
Example: 200 yes
18. 212
19. 218
20. 220
21. 230
22. 190
23. 240
24. 170
25. A strip chart recorder feeds paper past the pen at the rate of
2.5 cm/hr. Today you notice there are only 100 cm between the mark
you made yesterday and today - Is the recorder running too slow?
A. ( ) Yes
B. ( ) No
26. If a 0-10 VDC output is equal to 0-0.500 ppm and the relationship
is linear, then 2.5 VDC = ppm.
27. In standard electrical practice in AC current three wire configura-
tions (black, white, green), the black wire is usually:
A. ( ) the "hot" wire
B. ( ) the ground wire
C. ( ) the neutral wire
28. The same sample containing SC^ is fed into three SO2 analyzers - the
three reported concentrations are:
395 ppb (parts per billion)
399 ppb
387 ppb
4
-------
How would you report the average value for the S02 concentration?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
393 ppb
393.6666667 ppb
394 ppb
Any of the above values would be appropriate
None of the above
29. A graphical representation of the expression
would be:
A. ( ) A straight line
B. ( ) A curve
C. ( ) A circle
D. ( ) None of the above
30. Is the following statement true of false?
An arithmetic average is equal to a geometric mean.
A. ( ) True
B. ( ) False
y = mx + 6
5
-------
INTRODUCTION
AMBIENT AIR MONITORING
-------
INTRODUCTION TO AMBIENT AIR MONITORING
LEVEL II
PREPARED CLASS NOTES
-------
INTRODUCTION
1.0 Introduction to Level II Training
An Environmental Monitoring Training Program has been developed for
the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board by Environmental Research §
Technology, Inc. (ERT) under a contract for the Environmental Protection
Agency. The training program covers the following instrumentation:
• Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
• Meloy Model CS-10 Permeation Tube SO2 Calibrator
• Thermo Electron Model 143 Permeation Tube SO2 Calibrator
• Dasibi Model 1003 PC 0^ Monitor
• Bendix Model 8501-5CA CO Analyzer
• Esterline Angus MS401 Recorders
There will be two different classroom training programs: Level 1
and Level 2. Level 1 will consist of training in all aspects of opera-
tions, maintenance,' calibration, troubleshooting, and repairs for the
instrumentation listed in above. Level 1 training will consist of
approximately three weeks of classroom training. Personnel attending
Level 1 training will be divided into two groups and two continuous
three week sessions will be held. Level 2 will consist only of the
operation and routine maintenance of the instruments listed above and
classroom training is expected to last one week.
This binder has been prepared for the Level 2 classroom training
and includes a course outline, outlines summarizing material covered,
copies of overhead projection transparencies used during the training,
and other reference materials. The material in this binder is intended
to help students in that they will virtually not have to copy material
covered and will be able to concentrate better in the presentation.
1
-------
. Support documents handed to students will include the necessary
instrument manuals, standard operating procedures (SOPs) in conformance
with the most recently applicable EPA guidelines, and testing booklets
required to participate in the training program.
Personnel having completed the one week Level 2 training will be
expected to be able to perform the following tasks:
1) Routine in-shelter preliminary data checks
• preliminary evaluation of data recorded since last
shelter visit including any automated zero and span
checks
2) Routine instrument operational checks
• mode and status checks
3) Routine maintenance
• shelter checks
• external scrubbers
• calibration gas supply
• filters
• air conditioner status
4) Documentation
• following SOP's
t documentation of problems in log sheets
• documentation of instrument installation, removal, and
repairs made.
Because of the large amount of highly technical material associated
with air quality monitoring instrumentation to be covered during the
classroom training, daily and punctual attendance to the training
2
-------
sessions is highly encouraged. . A daily record of classroom attendance
will be kept. The instructor would be hesitant to recommend a comple-
tion certificate to be issued to an individual who has attended less
than 80% of the training sessions. The daily classroom sessions will
be held from 8:00 to 11:30 and from 12:30 to 4:00.
Examinations or quizzes will be given regularly as shown on the
schedule. They will serve as an evaluation of student performance and
will point to those areas in which difficulties were encountered and
the on-the-job training will be directed to helping the EQB personnel
to master them. The test results will be averaged, the passing grade
for receiving a certificate of training for each session being 75%. The
pre-test results will not be counted for this purpose; they will only
serve as a guide for the instructor.
3
-------
2.0 Why Monitor Air Pollutants?
The first question that comes to mind when designing a training
program in ambient air monitoring instrumentation is why do we want to
measure air pollutant concentrations? The following notes attempt to
give some insights to help answer that question.
2.1 Health Effects of Air Pollutants*
Scientists are convinced that air pollution is a very real con-
tributing factor to the three major types of diseases that cause sick-
ness and death in our society - heart disease, lung disease, and cancer.
Research has shown that air pollution will accelerate the rate of
disease in those persons already afflicted, and earlier death is a very
real possibility.
The problem of air pollution is not limited to those persons who
live in the cities or near the sources of pollution. Studies have
shown that air pollution can actually be hazardous to people who live
fifty or a hundred miles away from the pollution source. This is because
some common pollutants are transformed, while moving through the atmo-
sphere, by chemical reactions with sunlight into more hazardous pollu-
tants, such as photochemical oxidants that attack our lungs and respira-
tory system.
Following is a description of the six major air pollutants and their
effects on human health.
2.1.1 Sulfur Oxides
Approximately 95% of pollution-related sulfur oxide emissions in
this country are in the form of sulfur dioxide, a by-product of com-
bustion of fossil fuels such as oil and coal. The remaining 5% are in
the form of a variety of sulfur compounds that eventually are trans-
formed into sulfuric acid, another pollutant.
Coal or oil-burning power plants produce most of the sulfur
dioxide emissions, while autos account for only about 1%. Sulfur
dioxide oxidizes in the atmosphere to form sulfates, a particulate
*Adapted from "Health Effects of Air Pollutants", U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, June 1976.
4
-------
form of sulfur, the effects of which depend on particle size, dispersion
by weather conditions, and the presence of other pollutants which may
magnify the effects.
The levels of sulfates in the air often exceed those levels where
adverse human effects begin to appear. Sulfate concentrations greater
than 9 or 10 micrograms per cubic meter of air will aggravate asthma,
lung and heart disease, and the lung function in children.
The effect of sulfur dioxide is magnified by the presence of other
pollutants such as photochemical oxidants and by-products such as sulfuric
acid and hydrogen sulfide. The combination of these is known to affect
the respiratory tract.
Many scientists also believe this exposure to sulfates may be
cumulative, causing or increasing the likelihood of respiratory illness
such as bronchitis, emphysema, and asthma. Studies show that children
exposed to continuous high SC^ concentrations are more likely to develop
respiratory illness when high concentrations of particulates are present.
2.1.2 Particulate Matter
Total suspended particulates (TSP) is a term for the measurement of
all particles in our air, including soot, mists, and sprays. TSP
includes a wide range of non-toxic materials such as dust and dirt, and
many other materials that we know or suspect to be toxic, such as
beryllium, lead, asbestos, certain hydrocarbons which may be carcino-
genic, suspended sulfates and nitrates, and possibly, radioactive
elements.
The amount of toxic materials in our air will vary geographically,
depending on the man-made and natural sources in a particular area.
To date, few studies have been conducted on the health effects of
individual particles because of the wide range of differences in the
makeup of particulate concentrations. Particulate matter is studied
for the most part as a single contaminant, and most studies relate
particulate concentrations to death, respiratory illness, and breathing
problems in urban industrial areas where energy supplied by fossil fuel
consumption is a major concern.
5
-------
The effects of particulate air pollution on health are related to
injury to the surfaces of the respiratory system, that is, to the linings
of the lungs and throat. Such injury may be temporary or permanent. It
may be confined to the surface. However, by weakening resistance to
infection, such pollutants may affect the entire body adversely.
Chemicals carried into the lungs by particulates, for example, may
cause cancer to develop on the lung lining, which then may spread
throughout the body and prove fatal. Inhaled lead particulates may
cause lead poisoning - manifested by nervous and blood symptoms - while
causing very little damage to the lung itself.
In studies of air pollution in London and New York City, a rise in
the number of deaths has been recorded when both smoke and sulfur oxides
levels were high. Studies in Buffalo and Nashville also showed
increased death rates, particularly among older persons, where com-
bined pollution from particulates and sulfur oxides were recorded.
Eye irritation from dust particles also can be a problem in many areas.
2.1.3 Carbon Monoxide
Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless, odorless, tasteless gas
commonly found in our urban atmosphere in concentrations that can be
harmful to people. It is a by-product of combustion, and the greatest
single source of this pollutant is the automobile.
Carbon monoxide is inhaled through the lungs and enters the
blood stream by combining with hemoglobin, the substance that normally
carries oxygen to the cells. CO combines with hemoglobin much more,
readily than oxygen does. The result is that the amount of oxygen
getting to the tissues is drastically reduced in the presence of CO,
and this can have a profound effect on our health. CO also impairs
heart function by weakening the contractions of the heart which supply
blood to the various parts of the body. The effect of this on a healthy
person is to reduce significantly his ability to perform exercise, but
in a patient with heart disease, who is unable to compensate for the
decrease in oxygen, it can be a lift-threatening situation. A person
who has a heart attack in the presence of heavy carbon monoxide air
pollution is more likely to die than if the attack had occurred in
6
-------
clean air. And carbon monoxide is also harmful to persons who have
lung disease, anemia, or cerebral-vascular disease.
Carbon monoxide can also affect mental function at relatively low
concentrations. Visual perception and alertness can be affected.
2.1.4 Photochemical Oxidants
Photochemical oxidants are not emitted directly into the atmosphere
but are produced by a complex series of chemical reactions initiated when
certain emissions by autos and other sources - hydrocarbons and oxides
of nitrogen - are exposed to sunlight. Ozone, peroxyacyl nitrate (PAN),
formaldehyde, acrolein, nitrogen peroxide, and organic peroxides are all
formed in this manner. The presence of these pollutants in the atmo-
sphere is dependent on sunlight, so after nightfall their concentrations
are very low.
This type of pollution first gained attention in the 1940s as the
main cause of smog in Los Angeles. Since that time photochemical smog
has become common in many cities.
Photochemical oxidants are responsible for a number of health
effects in humans. They can affect the lungs and eyes. They may cause
respiratory irritation and even changes in lung function. They may
result in eye irritation with the familiar symptoms of tears and
inflammation. At certain concentrations they have been shown to impair
the performance of athletes, and to affect persons with asthma.
Ozone, the main constituent of photochemical smog, is a severe
irritant to all mucous membranes, and its main health effects are on
the respiratory system. It is virtually intolerable at levels of
1 part per million. At considerably lower concentrations (0.1 to 0.2 ppm)
which often occur in the air of many American cities, ozone in conjunc-
tion with other photochemical oxidants causes a variety of health effects
which are aggravated by exercise. Ozone also has an increased effect on
respiratory function in the presence of sulfur dioxide.
7
-------
2.1.5 Nitrogen Oxides
Oxides of nitrogen usually originate in high-temperature combustion
processes, and to a lesser extent in chemical plants.
Although measurement of this pollutant in the atmosphere is
difficult, experience has shown that in various forms, oxides of
nitrogen can affect humans as well as materials and vegetation.
Based on occupational exposures to nitrogen dioxide by firemen,
welders, silo fillers, miners, chemists, and other industrial workers,
we know that at high concentrations this pollutant can be fatal to
humans. At lower levels of 25 to 100 parts per million, it can cause
acute bronchitis and pneumonia.
The group of pollutants known as nitrogen oxides also can affect
lung tissue and lower the resistance of laboratory test animals to
influenza. Scientists suspect the same effect may occur in humans.
In one study of schoolchildren living near an industrial plant produc-
ing nitrogen dioxide, an increase in respiratory disease was noted.
Oxides of nitrogen also can react with hydrocarbons, in the presence
of sunlight, to form photochemical oxidants which, as noted previously,
can affect human lungs and eyes as well as cause respiratory irritation.
2.1.6 Hydrocarbons
Motor vehicles are the chief source of hydrocarbon emissions, with
the remainder coming from evaporation of industrial solvents in painting,
dry cleaning, and so on, and from gasoline marketing and incineration.
No adverse effects on human health are directly attributed to hydro-
carbons. However, this pollutant does react under sunlight, as indi-
cated previously, to form photochemical oxidants which do affect people,
causing respiratory irritation and the stinging, watery eye reaction
associated with urban smog.
2.2 Air Pollution Related Legislation
In view of the health effects of air pollutants, and in order to
protect the public from increasing pollutant levels in the Nation, in
1967 the Congress wrote the Clean Air Act to address those effects.
Table 1 summarizes the federal air pollution acts.
8
-------
TABLE 1
SUMMARY OF FEDERAL AIR POLLUTION ACTS
Year
Enacted
1955
1963
1965
1967
Title
Purpose
Air Pollution Control Act First federal legislation.
Clean Air Act
Amended Clean Air Act
Air Quality Act
Federal financial assistance but
problem left to the states.
First federal emission standards
for cars.
First Air Quality Criteria Reports,
first requirement for ambient stan-
dards, but these to be set by the
states.
1970 Amended Air Quality Act
1978 Clean Air Act Amendments
First national ambient standards
and these to be set by federal
action; first national emission
standards to be set for certain
pollutants; first standards of
performance for new plants; con-
tinued state implementation.
Prevention of significant deteri-
oration in areas meeting standards
was fully addressed; continued
state implementation.
9
-------
Prompted by widespread public support, Congress in 1970 enacted
the landmark Clean Air Amendments, now usually called simply the Clean
Air Act, a law which continues to be of major importance in protecting
public health and welfare from air pollution.
It gave the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) responsibility
for setting and enforcing standards on various types of air pollutants
suspected of having an impact on public health and welfare. The Agency
subsequently set air quality standards for six common classes of pollu-
tants: sulfur oxides, particulate matter, carbon monoxide, photochemical
oxidants, nitrogen oxides, and hydrocarbons.
These standards are known as the National Ambient Air Quality
Standards (NAAQS for short). There are primary and secondary standards.
The primary standards are health-effect related and are thus stricter.
Secondary standards are related to economic losses caused by pollutant
concentrations at or above those standards.
In general, day-to-day enforcement of the Clean Air Act is left up
to the states. The states, in turn, sometimes delegate authority to
individual cities or air basins. In cases where an air basin crosses
state lines (New York City's, for instance, includes parts of New Jersey
and Connecticut) states and local jurisdictions maintain authority only
over sources within their boundaries.
The states are responsible for formulating control strategies and
formalizing them into documents called State Implementation Plans (SIPs).
In Puerto Rico, the SIP is called Clean Air for Puerto Rico. The SIPs
include regulations that limit allowable pollutant emissions into the
atmosphere.
The states' implementation plans set restrictions on the sources
of air pollution within their boundaries so that federally set ambient
air standards can be met. In addition, state and local governments must
monitor air quality. The higher the population density, the more sophis-
ticated the monitoring must be. Ambient air standards for six major
air pollutants (sulfur oxides, nitrogen oxides, particulate matter,
carbon dioxide, hydrocarbons, and oxidants) were published April 30, 1971.
10
-------
The permissible emission limits listed in federal and state air
pollution regulations are meaningless without knowing how those limits
are determined. In other words, one must know how emissions are measured
before the amount of pollution released can be defined. Thus, test
procedures are also provided in the regulations. It should be noted
that these vary from state to state, and even from source to source,
depending on when the facility was built. In addition, plant operators
may be able to substitute an easier test for a more difficult one.
Ambient Monitoring
At minimum, state air pollution control agencies must monitor
atmospheric concentrations of suspended particulates, and sulfur dioxide.
In high-population areas, they must also monitor carbon monoxide, photo-
chemical oxidants and nitrogen dioxide to assure that federal ambient
air standards are not exceeded. EPA has published guidelines and regu-
lations for the location of ambient air monitoring stations as well as
overall network design. Under certain conditions, it may be worthwhile
for a company to monitor ambient air near its plant as well, although
this is not required by law. Such records could, for instance, be
handy in defending oneself from suits by neighbors. In addition, local
officials can order production curtailed when pollutants reach levels
immediately dangerous to health. Plants in areas where such pollution
alerts are common may find such monitoring useful to gain time for an
orderly shutdown before officials actually issue the order. This is
especially easy for particulate matter, which can be easily measured
with simple, rugged tape samplers and high-volume samplers.
The low ambient pollutant levels mandated by EPA, however, impose
tough requirements for other instrumentation - especially measuring
devices for sulfur dioxide, carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides and photo-
chemical oxidants. Equipment must be able to measure the pollutant
with only minimal "interference." That is, it must not mistake one
pollutant for another. Instruments must also be able to react quickly
to changing pollutant concentrations, yet be easy to keep calibrated.
EPA specifications for ambient air monitoring equipment were first
published on August 14, 1971.
11
-------
3.0 National Air Ambient Quality Standards
Pollutant
Primary Standard
(yearly average)
Secondary Standard
(yearly average)
0.02 ppm
60 yg/m3
0.03 ppm
TSP
CO
9 ppm (1 hr)
75 yg/m3)
9 ppm (1 hr)
Oxidants
0.08 ppm
0.05 ppm
0.24 ppm
0.08 ppm
0.05 ppm
0.24 ppm
NO
HC
4.0 Measuring Air Pollutants
Typically, the measurement of particulates has been done by
mechanical means; that is, an air sample is filtered through a pre-
weighed filter and the weight increase is noted while the sample's
volume is determined. This method is referred to as High-Vol sampling
because a fairly large amount of air is filtered for one sample.
For measuring gaseous air pollutants, the "first-generation"
analyzers relied on "wet chemistry". An air sample was bubbled through
a series of reagents sensitive to the pollutant being measured. The
concentration was determined by titration of the reagents. The process
was usually lengthy, time consuming and could not provide continuous
"real-time" data.
A second generation of analyzers has in recent years gained accep-
tance, because they are more reliable, easier to operate, and able to
operate continuously. These instruments rely on the specific pollutants
having characteristic light absorption or emission spectra that can be
measured. Some of the measurement methods are formally known as flame
photometry, pulsed fluorescence, infrared light absorption, and ultra-
violet light absorption. It is on instruments that utilize those
techniques that this course will focus on.
12
-------
5.0 The Need for Standardization
Since there are more than fifty state agencies (50 states, Puerto
Rico, and the Virgin Islands) operating air quality monitoring instru-
mentation, some measures had to be taken to standardize the procedures
to insure uniformity in determining compliance with the NAAQS.
According to Federal Regulations, air monitoring equipment used for
determining compliance with NAAQS or for Prevention of Significant
Deterioration (PSD) monitoring, the Reference method or Equivalent
Analyzers must be used.
The "Reference Method" is the analytical method or analyzer used to
determine compliance with NAAQS and is certified by EPA as such.
"Equivalent" analyzers are analyzers that have met criteria set by
EPA and may be used in lieu of Reference Methods.
In order to insure continuous monitors are working properly, they
must be calibrated frequently as mandated by Federal Regulations. In a
calibration, the analyzer is challenged with a known concentration of the
pollutant measured [usually traceable to the National Bureau of Standards
(NBS)], the response is noted, and if necessary is adjusted to within
specified tolerances.
Independent audits must also be performed as required to insure
compliance with regulatory requirements.
This course will point out proper calibration procedures, as well
as routine checks, to insure proper operation of instrumentation.
13
-------
PERMEATION TUBE
SO* CALIBRATORS
-------
PERMEATION TUBE S02 CALIBRATORS
PREPARED CLASS NOTES
Part I Introduction
Part II Thermo Electron Model 143
Part III Meloy Model CS-10
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The quality assurance requirements for State and Local Air Monitoring
Stations (SLAMS) and Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) air
monitoring mandate that continuous SO2 analyzers be periodically zeroed,
span checked, calibrated, and audited.
The use of permeation tubes to generate calibration SO2 gas mixtures
is widely used. The National Bureau of Standards (NBS) has developed
and made available SO2 permeation tubes. These are regarded as Standard
Reference Materials (SRM's) and are considered primary standards.
S02 permeation tubes consist of FEP Teflon tubing that contain
liquified SO2, hermetically sealed under its own pressure. These tubes
are plugged with a section of Teflon rod, charged with liquefied SO2,
and sealed. Collars of inert metal are used to reinforce the end
seals.*
The sealed gas permeates through the tube's walls and evaporates
from the outer surface at a constant rate if the tube is held at a
constant temperature. The process is highly temperature sensitive;
therefore the temperature must be controlled with iQ.l°C.* Known con-
centrations of SO2 may be prepared by passing a known flow of clean dry
air over the permeation device.
*F. P. Scarignelli, A. E. O'Keefe, E. Rosenberg, J. P. Bell, Analytical
Chemistry, Vol 42, No. 8, July 1970.
-------
2. PERMEATION TUBE CALIBRATORS
2.1 Objective:
• The objective is to produce a gaseous sample with a known
concentration of S02. The concentration should be within
the range of whatever SO2 analyzer that is to be calibrated/
audited and should also meet minimum flow requirement of the
analyzer.
• Since the permeation device gives off SO2 at a constant rate,
the SO^ can be diluted in a calibrated clean, dry flow of
air to produce the required concentrations:
where
C = SO2 concentration in ppm (vol)
R = certified permeation rate in ng/min
K = 0.382 ppm SO2 (from diluting lng S02 in one liter of air)
(K = constant for specific permeant)
Qq = flow rate of gas, m£/min
2.2 Requirements:
• Permeation tube, NBS calibrated with permeation rate specified
in ng/min at a given temperature.
• Calibrator should have permeation oven that can be kept at
specified temperature ±0.1°C. This requires the following
electronics:
a. Control circuit - heater
b. Feedback circuit
• Calibrator should have provision for scrubbing utilized air
so that it is free of particulates, S02, and humidity.
-------
o Calibrator should have calibrated flow metering and control
pneumatics.
-------
Electronics
To Maintain Oven
Temperature
to within ±0.1°C
rnr
Clean,
Dry Air
-C^—*
Valve
wmmmm
m * I
mmmmrnrn
Scrubber
Flow
Metering
Device
i
Control | Feedback
i_L
To Analyzer
Permeation
Oven
Permeation
Tube
CONCEPTUAL PERMEATION TUBE CALIBRATOR
-------
EST
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Date: : Technician:
Instrumant: Type: Model:
Mfg: Range:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Model:
SN: Range:
Calibration Gas:
~ Mass Flowmeter
Instrument •«
Voltage, VDc
Flow Rate, /min
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
15
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
1814 (4/79)
-------
Instrument Model Mfg SN EQBSN
Roto meter Calibration (Range) Date
Ball Height in cm
-------
7904006
DETERMINATION OF S02 CONCENTRATION
(CALIBRATOR OUTPUT)
C = S02 CONCENTRATION IN PPM (VOLUME)
R = PERMEATION RATE IN NG/MIN (AT SPECIFIED TEMPERATURE ±0.1 °C)
K = 0.382ppm S02-mi /ng S02 (K = CONSTANT FOR SPECIFIC PERMEANT)
Q = FLOW RATE OF GAS INmH /MIN
-------
Instrument.
Model
SN.
EQB SN
Permeation Tube SN.
Date
[S021
ppm
Ball Height in cm
-------
3. THE THERMO ELECTRON MODEL 143 PERMEATION TUBE CALIBRATOR
(See the following attachments)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: Number: Q14
Revision: 0
EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the
Teco 143 Multipoint Permeation Tube
SO2 Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube SO2 Calibrator
1.0 Applicability
This SOP applies to the laboratory overhaul, checkout, and calibration
of the TECO 143 Multipoint Permeation Tube Calibrators used in the
EQB network for calibrating SO2 analyzers.
2.0 Supporting Materials
Digital Multimeter (Fluke 8000 or equivalent).
Thermistor or thermometer calibrated to 35°C ± 0.1°C (NBS traceable).
Leak Checker.
Mass flow meter (Hastings or equivalent) range 0 to 15 i,/min (NBS traceable).
Teco 143 manual.
Pressure gauge.
3.0 Preliminary checks, and pneumatic overhaul - refer to and fill out
forms }4A.
3.1 Visual Check
3.1.1 Check all lines are properly connected.
3.1.2 Verify capillary is installed and clean (1 1/4" xO.lO)
black, long.
3.1.3 Verify power switch and lamp operate.
3.1.4 Verify solenoid valve operation (audible).
3.1.5 Verify fan operation.
3.1.6 Check for any visual damage.
3.2 Penumatic system overhaul
3.2.1 Replace any discolored or otherwise damaged or suspect lines
(FEP teflon). ¦
3.2.2 Replace or overhaul pump on a yearly basis.
3.2.3 Adjust pump pressure deadhead to 10 psi via the relief
pressure regulator mounted on the pump.
3.2.4 Replace the charcoal in scrubber and particulate
filter.
3.2.5 Leak test the system - see note on instrument inspection and
overhaul report form.
3.2.6 Verify the solenoid valve operation as indicated on item 4
of the enclosed form.
Page 1 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 2 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143 Number: 014
Multipoint Permeation Tube SO^ Calibrator Revision: 0
4.0 Rotameter Calibration
4.1 Insure that the system is leak free.
4.2 Block vent branch of outlet tee and connect the other branch to a mass
flow meter having a current calibration seal.
4.3 Read and record flow in liters per minute (£/min) for a minimum of
9 ball heights between 2 and 14.5 centimeters. (This is done for both
the steel and glass balls. Read the top of the ball. Use the attached
form. (Form 014B)
4.4 Using arithmetic graph paper, plot ball height (in centimeters) versus
measured flow (in &/min for each ball).
4.5 Connect the plotted points with a straight line, if linear, or a smooth
curve, if not linear (foT each ball).
5.0 Electronics Adjustment
5.1 Verify power supply to board-top of R1 to ground is 13VDC, if not adjust
with PI.
5.2 Turn unit on and allow it to warm up for 30 minutes.
5.3 Verify the oven temperature is at 35°C ± 0.1°C with a calibrated thermistor
or thermometer, if not adjust with P-4.
5.4 Adjust meter indication with P2 and P3.
5.5 With a DMM determine the resistance of the metering circuit thermistor
when the oven is set at the proper temperature and place a sticker
indicating this value on the oven housing.
6.0 Determination of output SO2 concentration
6.1 Install an NBS certified 5 cm S02 permeation tube in the oven.
6.2 From the certification documentation determine the permeation rate
(yg/min).
6.3 Using the certified permeation rate, calculate and record the expected
output of the calibrator for each ball height measured in step 4.3,
using the following equation:
Ave Perm rate ^ rPPm^
Calibrator Output (pg/min) ' yg '
Concentration (ppn.1 * CaUblator flo„ „ each baU
height (mJi/min)
Using all the output concentrations derived above, on semilog graph
paper plot output concentrations in ppm on the log scale versus ball
height in centimeters on the arithmetic scale.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: EQB Laboratory Overhaul and Calibration of the Teco 143
Multipoint Permeation Tube SC^ Calibrator
Using a french curve or a flex curve, draw a continuous curve
representative of the plotted points.
6.4 Using the curves derived in Section 6.3 determine the ball heights
that would produce the following concentrations:
0.05 ppm
0.10 ppm
0.20 ppm
0.30 ppm
0.45 ppm
and record the information on a calibration card noting the tube
serial number, date installed, and whether the ball height used for
obtaining above concentrations is the steel or the glass one.
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 014
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
INSTRUMENT INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL REPORT
Manufacturer - Thermo Electron
Instrument - Model 143 S02 Permeation Calibrator
Serial No.
Date:
Inspector:
EQB No.
(Yes or No)
(Unless Noted)
1. Visual Check:
All lines connected
Capillary installed
(1 1/4" x .010) Black, Long
Power switch and lamp operate
Solenoid valve operates (Audible)
Panel meter lamp indicates proper Temperature (after 15 min. warmup)
Fan operating
Any visual damage
Other .
2. Replace charcoal scrubber and particulate filter
3. Pump Pressure Check (Deadhead) PSI
Adjusted to 10 PSI
Gas Leak at permeation oven cap (snoop on cap) w/o pressure
Gas Leak at permeation oven cap (snoop on cap) w pressure*
4. Output of 13.0 VDC (Top of R^ to gnd.)
Adjusted with P^
Oven thermister resistance (with traceable lab. thermister KOHM
Readjust oven temp, with P4
Reset meter P3
30°C oven 35°C oven
5. Solenoid valve operation** (zero-span)
*To pressure system: Increase flow to maximum and block output and vent
ports. Balls should drop to zero (some bounce will be noted), DO NOT
PRESSURE for longer than ONE minute.
**A Rotometer or massflowmeter may be placed on the output of the solenoid
bypass charcoal scrubber. The Flow should be approx. 150-180 cc/min. with
the flow mode switch in the Zero position and Zero in the Span position
EQB FORM 014-A
-------
ERT
FLOW RATE CALIBRATION BY MASS FLOW METER
Date: Technician:
Instrument: Type: Model:
Mfg: Range:
SN:
. Standard: Mfg: Model:
SN: Range:
Calibration Gao:
L- Mass Howmeter
Instrument •*
Voltage, Vqc
Flow Rate, /mln
Ball Height (cm)
Steel
Ball Height (cm)
Gloss
16
14
13
11
9
8
7
5
4
1814 (4/79)
-------
7903)47 7903148
7903150
I
RV,
Clean S02 Free Air Regulated to 10 psig
Rl - Differential Pressure Regulator
FMi — Flowmeter/Rotometer
MVi — Manual Needle Valve
Dirty Room Air at Atmospheric Pressure to
Clean Room Air at approximately 17 psig
Fi — Balston Particulate Filter, Type 90/Grade C
P] — Thomas Single Sided Pump
Internal
Vent
FMi
I
Ri
Brominated/lodated
Active Charcoal
Scrubber
-CSJ-
" I
I
I
I
4-
MVt
Permeation
Tube Oven
Capillary
.010" Internal Diameter
1 Vi" Length
NOi
—O Sample In
(Optional)
SV2
(Optional)'
Ino
I COM^^'SV1
irVi Tnc
-O Output
External
Vent
Internal
Vent
ffo Brominated/lodated
wfi Active Charcoal
W Scrubber
Clean Room Air Regulated to 10 psig.
RVi — Backpressure Regulator
(Relief Valve)
SVi — 3-Way Solenoid Valve
Output — Bulkhead Fitting Connected to
Span Port of Analyzer
Vent — Bulkhead Fitting Connected to
Atmospheric Pressure Exhaust Manifold
Thermo Electron Model 143 Permeation Tube Calibrator
Schematic of Flow System
-------
4. THE MELOY CS-10 MULTIPOINT S02 CALIBRATOR
(See the following attachments)
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure ,71 /7Q
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 009
Revision: 0
Routine Field Operation of the
Meloy CS-10 SO2 Calibrator
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 1 of 1
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Field Operation of the Meloy CS-10 SO2 Calibrator
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 009
Revision: 0
1.0 Applicability
This procedure is to be used as a supplement to SOP's 001-006 EQB Field
Routine Visit, and 2000-224 Multipoint Span Check/Field Calibration: Teco
43 SO2 Analyzer at those sites where the Meloy CS-10 is used as the in-
station calibrator for the Teco Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescence SC^ Analyzer.
2.0 Checks to be performed every site visit: Verify that ball height is at
designated value. Verify that cooling fan and pump are operating and check
if temperature control pilot lamp is flashing, indicating oven is at proper
temperature. (Note nonflashing lamp may be due to defective lamp and not to
improper oven temperature - replace lamp to verify this case.)
3.0 Maintenance. The calibrator will be overhauled and calibrated every six
months according to SOP 013.
4.0 The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct audits of this procedure.
Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
7'HIIOO'.
Meloy CS-10 SO2 Calibration Source
Flow Diagram
Vent
&
Pump
P1
FM1
Water Drain
—
R1
Filter/Scrubber
Assembly
¦csj-
MV1
Permeation Tube
Oven
Capillary Metal
Tubing
P-| Thomas Single Sided Pump
R-) Differential Pressure Regulator
MVIi Manual Needle Valve
FM1 Flowmeter/Rotometer
-------
TECO SOs. ANALYZER
MODEL 43
-------
THERMO ELECTRON MODEL 43
PULSED FLUORESCENT S02 ANALYZER
Prepared Class Notes
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Sulfur dioxide, which is one of the products of combustion of most
organic fuels, is generally considered to be one of the largest pollu-
tants discharged into the atmosphere by man. Because of this, ambient
air monitoring programs almost always require that the concentration
of this material be determined. Many of the instruments in use today
for the monitoring of sulfur dioxide suffer from several shortcomings.
First generation instrumentation, employing automated wet chemical
procedures, suffer from interferences by other pollutants such as ozone.
Additionally, an inordinate amount of time and manpower is required to
maintain them in operating condition. Newer techniques, generally
considered as second generation analyzers, tend to be non-specific to
sulfur dioxide, require complex flow and temperature control, and require
support equipment such as hydrogen cylinders or generators.
Thermo Electron's patented (#3,845,309) Pulsed Fluorescent concept
is generally considered as the first third generation ambient sulfur
dioxide analyzer.
1.2 The following equations describe the fluorescence phenomenon:
SO^ + hv^
SO^ + hv^
where:
SO^ - Sulfur Dioxide
SO^* - electronically excited SO2
hVj - ultraviolet radiation, 230-190 nm wavelength
hv^ - fluorescence
-------
1.3 The method used in the TECO for sulfur dioxide (SC^) detection is
Pulsed Fluorescence. A gas sample is submitted to a source of pulsed
ultraviolet illumination through a monochromatic filter (narrow bandpass).
SC>2 molecules, energized by the high intensity pulsed light source,
emit an SO^ specific illumination which, through a second narrow band
filter, impinges upon the sensitive surface of a photomultiplier tube.
The emitted light is linearly proportional to the concentration of SC^
molecules in the sample. Electronic, solid state amplification of the
output of the photomultiplier tube and signal conditioning for the
elimination of signal noise, provide a meter reading and an electronic
analog signal for recorder output.
-------
7909139 "0SU1
Ultraviolet
_ .. . Interference
Combining FNter
Lens p
I
lagg
Pulsating
Ultraviolet
Light
Sample
Gas Out
Sample
Gas In
¦/,
Reaction
Chamber
Optical
Filter
Photomultiplier
Tube
Negative DC
j Voltage
Electronics
r
Current Output
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Principle of Operation
-------
790S MS 79CS1 »4 M6
MB-41 Pump
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Gas Flow Schematic
-------
79031M 7903155 . 7903153
uv
Flash Lamp
Power Supply
UV
Interference
Filter
UV
Rash
Lamp
S02
Reaction
Chamber
PMT
lOptical
Filter
Range
Switch
Current
Analog Panel
Meter
Pre
Variable
Gate
Output
amp
Voltage
Gain amp
amp
/ZeroN
vEv
Voltage
Divider
Strip
Chart
Recorder
± 15vDC
Power
Supply
Thermo Electron Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SO2 Analyzer
Electronic Block Diagram
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date:
Title: Number: 005
Revision: 0
Routine Operation of the Teco Model 43
Pulsed Fluorescent SC^ Analyzer
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
.284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation of the Teco Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent SC^
Analyzer
1.0 Applicability
This procedure is to be used as a supplement to SOP 001 EQB Field Site
Routine Visit at those sites where SO2 is measured with the Teco Model 43
Pulsed Fluorescence analyzer. Responsibilities and the methodology of data
validation outlined in SOP 001 apply to this procedure and to the use of
Status/Data Assessment Sheet 001-A.
2.0 Checks to be Performed Every Site Visit
2.1 Check that the shelter temperature is between 67°F and 78°F, and that
the manifold pump and calibration controller are functioning properly.
Check that the calibrator temperature is within ±0.1°C of designated.
Note any adjustments in Field Station Log.
2.2 Teco 43 Checks - Note whether ball height on rotameter is between 2 and
4. If it is not, clean the flow capillary. Open the left section of
the front panel. Check that pressure regulator reads 10 ± 0.1 in. Hg.
Adjust if necessary using the diaphragm regulator.
2.3 SO2 Data Checks - roll back strip chart to the time of the last visit.
Check that all prior baselines are 0 ± 0.005 ppm (0.10V). If recorder
has been offset 10%, allowable baseline range will be 0.9 VDC to 1.1 VDC
on strip chart. Check that all spans are within ±15% of designated.
Adjust baseline and/or perform manual span check to verify that instrument
is now within calibration specs, if necessary.,
3.0 Manual Calibration
Perform a manual zero and span check at least once a week unless specified
more frequently in network QA plan.
4.0 Weekly Checks
4.1 Check that the cooling fan and pump are working. Inspect the capillary.
Clean or replace if necessary. Verify that the UV lamp is working by
listening for a clicking sound which indicates pulsation.
4.2 Perform PC board full scale check according to the manufacturer's
manual. Also perform full scale check of output amplifier board. Note
whether outputs are within specs listed on sheet.
5.0 Bi-Weekly Maintenance
Every other week change the particulate filter and indicate on the assessment
sheet.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
Page of
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 005
Revision: 0
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation of the Teco Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent
SC>2 Analyzer
6.0 Periodic Maintenance
Multipoint span checks should be performed according to the schedule indicated
in the network QA plan, and the instrument should be recalibrated if necessary.
Every 12 months the hydrocarbon cutter should be replaced and this action
noted in the field station log.
7.0 Audits
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of this proce-
dure. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
Page of
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 005
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET 001A
TECO MODEL 43 S02
SOP 001
NETWORK:
STATION:
STATION NO.:
OPERATOR:
WEEK ENDING:
DATE:
DATA
Valid Suspect
LOCAL STANDARD TIME:
/ or NO*
SHELTER STATUS:
Temp. = 67° - 78°F?
Manifold Pump OK?
Calibration Controller OK?
CALIBRATOR:
Temp. = Des. ±0.1°C
TECO 43 STATUS:
Flow Rate = 2 to 4 SCFH?
Pressure at 10 ± 0.1" Hg?
Strip Chart Time, Supply
Marked?
TECO 43 DATA:
All Prior BLs 0 ppm
± 0.005 ppm (0.10V)
All prior Spans ±15%
of Desig.
Entire prior chart OK?
MANUAL CALIBRATION: DATE
Zero = 0 ± 0.005 ppm (0.10V)?
Calibrator Flow ± .5 mm of Des.?
Teco output ±15% of Des.?
WEEKLY CHECKS:
Cooling fan working? Pump OK? Capillaries clean? UV lamp working?
PC Board: FS = 10 ± 0.01 Volts?
Output Board: FS = 10 ± 0.01 V?
BI-WEEKLY: Particulate filter changed?
*Explanations of all NO entries should appear in the field station log.
EQB Form 001-A
-------
BENDIX CO ANALYZER
MODEL 8501-5CA
-------
BENDIX MODEL 8501-5CA CO MONITOR
Prepared Class Notes
-------
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The method used in the Bendix for; carbon monoxide (CO) detection is
infrared light absorption. A single infrared light beam is alternately
modulated between^a sample and reference (CO free) cells. An infrared
light detector coupled to the sample and reference cells exhibits a
capacitance change proportional to the amount of CO present in the
sample cell. The principle of measurement is based on CO having a known
characteristic absorption spectra in the infrared range.
1.2 The relationship of detection is as follows:
at „ i -Acl
AC ^ 1 -e
where
C is capacitance change
c is CO concentration
1 is cuvette length
1.3 Converting the change in capacitance in the detection chamber to an
output usable for a recorder requires the use of electronic circuitry
and the associated plumbing to condition the sample prior to injection
into the sample cell of the detector. For the purpose of calibrating,
the analyzer plumbing is also required for injecting zero and span
gases.
1.4 This analyzer, like most others, can be subdivided into three
systems:
a) pneumatics
b) optics
c) electronics
-------
1.5 Basic Infrared Absorption Gas Analyzer Technique optical bench
(see Figure 7-5 in manual) consists of:
• infrared light source
• absorption cell of certain pathlength
• detector
1.5.1 Sample air is passed through the absorption cell. CO
absorbs (or attenuates) the light and thus the reduction in light is
a quantitative measure of the CO present in the sample.
1.5.2 In order to determine how much CO is present in the sample,
there is a constant referencing against a reference cell filled with a
nonabsorbing (CO free) gas (nitrogen). The detector will produce a
change in capacitance if there is an imbalance between the sample and
reference chambers (if CO is present in the sample).
-------
190S1S9 7903194
Needle
Valve
Bendix 8501-SCA Carbon Monoxide Analyzer
Row Diagram
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: 3/1/79
Title: Number: 007
Revision: q
ROUTINE SITE VISIT AND PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
OF THE BENDIX 8501-5CA CO ANALYZER
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH § TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
Under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
T } . ROUTINE SITE VISIT AND PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OF
BENDIX 8501-5CA CO ANALYZER
1.0 Applicability
1.1 Applicability. This SOP addresses sites where carbon monoxide is
measured using the Bendix 8501-5CA. This procedure is to be used
as a supplement to SOP 001 EQB Field Site Routine Visit.
2.0 Data Validity and Instrument Status
2.1 The Status/Data Assessment Sheet 001-B is to be filled out at least
once each week.
2.2 The check-off procedure requires the entering of a check (/) , indi-
cating YES, or a NO for each item. The entering of a NO often indicates
that on-site corrective action or notification of district personnel
for corrective action assistance is required. The appropriate action
should be taken and stated in the field station log.
2.3 Spaces are provided on the sheets for identifying data as valid,
suspect, or invalid. The field technician is required to classify all
data obtained during the week, by date and time, based on the criteria
listed and THE BEST JUDGMENT OF THE FIELD TECHNICIAN.
3.0 Routine Checks (each site visit)
3.1 Bendix 8501-5CA CO Analyzer (Status/Data Assessment Sheet)
3.1.1 Status - Verify that strip chart time is accurate, supply is
adequate until next visit, and date and time of visit are
clearly marked. Check that sample flow is set at ball height
3.0 and pressure of calibration gases are greater than
300 psi. NOTE: If ball height requires adjustment see
Paragraph 4.1.2 before adjusting.
3.1.2 Data - Verify that all prior zeros are between 8% and 12% of
full recorder scale (Oil ppm) and all prior spans are
within ±5% of designated span value. If not, does manual
recalibration correct the problem? (See weekly checks.)
NOTE: This instrument is run with a zero instrument baseline
and a 10% baseline offset on the recorder. Thus, the full
scale on the recorder will be 45 ppm.
3.1.3 If the unit is not capable of automatic zero and span,
these functions should be performed manually at each visit
and results indicated under status. See weekly checks for
calibration procedure.
Page 1 of 2
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 007
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure Date: 3/1/79
Title: ROUTINE SITE VISIT AND PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OF BENDLX Number: 007
8501-5CA CO ANALYZER Revision: 0
4.0 Weekly Checks
4.1 Perform the checks indicated on the assessment sheet. Drain any
condensate in the glass bowl containing the sample filter. Normal
replacement interval is once a month for the sample filter and once
every six months for the gas filter. Note filter replacements in the
log. Perform a manual calibration as follows.
4.1.1 With instrument in the 50 ppm (Normal Operational) range, set
mode selector valve to zero.
4.1.2 Note if ball height is 3.0 ± 1 cm. Do not readjust at this
time. Complete steps 4.1.3-4.1.5. Then readjust flow to
Ball Height 3.0 and complete steps 4.1.6-4.1.8.
4.1.3 After the output has stabilized, put filter switch to out
position. Verify that noise extreme is 0.2 VDC or less.
4.1.4 Return filter switch to in and record initial zero as read on
a DVM. Make no adjustment.
NOTE: On 50 ppm range, PPM=VDC X 5.
4.1.5 Turn mode selector valve to span. After instrument output
has stabilized, record SPAN value as read on a DVM and
converted to ppm. If ball height was 3.0 ± 1 cm and initial
zero is 0 ± 1 ppm and initial span is within ±5% of the tank
concentration, the instrument is in calibration. If the
readings are outside these limits, proceed to step 4.1.6.
4.1.6 Turn mode selector valve to zero. After stabilization, reset
zero adjust to obtain a zero ±1 ppm output.
4.1.7 Turn mode selector valve to span. After stabilization, reset
span adjust to obtain an output equivalent to the designated
cylinder output ±5%.
4.1.8 Return mode selector valve to zero and check that output
after stabilization is as set in step 4.1.6. If it is not,
repeat steps 4.1.6 through 4.1.8 until stable readings are
obtained. Note that final values are in spec and the previous
and current settings for zero and span pots.
NOTE: Calibrations should be performed only with certified
cylinders of gas.
5.0 Quality Assurance Audit
The Divisional Quality Assurance Officer will conduct periodic audits of the
procedure discussed above and corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET
BENDIX 8501-5CA-C0 ANALYZER
NETWORK
STATION
STATION NUMBER
OPERATOR
WEEK ENDING
DATE
LOCAL STANDARD TIME
/ or NO*
DATA
VALID SUSPECT INVALID
(Show date and time for each
category)
SHELTER STATUS: Temp. (67-78°F)
Manifold Pump OK?
BENDIX CO STATUS: S/N
Strip Chart time, supply
marked?
Sample flow = 3.00 ± 1 cm?
Cal. Gases > 300 psi?
DATA: Strip chart? .
All prior Os 8-12%?
All prior spans ±5% of Des.?
If not, is recal. OK?
Entire prior chart OK?
NORMAL CONDITIONS?
WEEKLY CHECKS
BENDIX CO
Back pressure ± 1 psi of Des.?
Sample filter clean? Gas filter clean?
Manifold connections tight? Vent lines unobstructed?_
Unfiltered noise < 0.2V?
CALIBRATION:
Initial: Zero ppm Span ppm
Final: Zero = 0 ± 1 ppm? Span = Des. ppm ± 5%?
Zero Pot. Prev./Current / Span Pot. Prev./Current /
*Explanation of all NO entries should appear in field station log.
EOB Form 001-B
-------
DASIBIO, ANALYZER
MODEL 1003 PC
-------
DASIBI MODEL 1003PC
OZONE ANALYZER
PREPARED CLASS NOTES
-------
DASIBI MODEL 1003-PC OZONE MONITOR
Prepared Class Notes
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The method used in the Dasibi for ozone (0^) detection is light
absorption. Because of the particular structure of the 0^ molecule, it
will absorb light energy at and about the wavelength of 254 nanometers
(nm) [long ultraviolet (UV) region]. No other molecule normally found
in ambient air will absorb as much light energy at this frequency as 0^.
1.2 Beer-Lambert Law
I . = I. exp (- LC)
out in v v x
IQut = Light Intensity Out
1^ = Light Intensity In
X = Absorption Coefficient
L = Path Length
C = Concentration
1.3
DEPENDENT
Light Intensity
Pressure
Temperature
Concentration
Path Length
•VARIABLES
INDEPENDENT
Flow
CONSTANT
Absorption Coefficient
1.4 Basic UV Photometer Technique
Measuring cell consists of:
• UV source 254 nm
• Absorption cell of certain path length
• Detector
-------
1.4.1 Sample air is passed through the absorption cell. Ozone
attenuates the light. The reduction in light is a
quantitative measure of the 0^ present in the sample.
1.4.2 Questions
• How much light did we start with?
• How much light is lost in the cell with no 0^ present?
• How can one tell zero concentration of 0^ if some absorption
takes place with no 0^ present?
• What happens when the light source changes intensity?
• What happens if the detector's sensitivity changes?
1.4.3 Conditions for Using UV Photometry
• An air sample with a zero 0^ concentration.
• An air sample identical to the first in its light absorbing
properties except for the unknown 0^ concentration.
• A UV light source of known wavelength and fixed intensity.
• A stable detector.
• A known and fixed path length.
• The value of X, the absorption coefficient at the wavelength
being used.
• Standard pressure and temperature reference.
-------
BEER-LAMBERT LAW
BASIC EQUATION
lIN = LIGHT INTENSITY IN
l0UT= LIGHT INTENSITY OUT
X = ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT
L = PATH LENGTH
C = CONCENTRATION
-------
Control
Detector
UV
Light
Source
Quartz
Window
'in c
^-^f] •••/.• •' 7::C •' •' :': • '
Quartz
Window Sample
Detector
y
Y J 1 1 1 1 / 1 1 J T
f
Absorption
Cell
BASIC UV PHOTOMETER TECHNIQUE
-------
CONDITIONS FOR USING UV PHOTOMETRY
1) AN AIR SAMPLE WITH A ZERO OZONE CONCENTRATION
2) AN AIR SAMPLE IDENTICAL TO THE FIRST IN ITS LIGHT
ABSORBING PROPERTIES EXCEPT FOR THE UNKNOWN
OZONE CONCENTRATION
3) AN UV LIGHT SOURCE OF KNOWN WAVELENGTH AND
FIXED INTENSITY
4) A STABLE DETECTOR
5) A KNOWN AND FIXED PATH LENGTH
6) THE VALUE OF X, THE ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT AT THE
WAVELENGTH BEING USED
7) STANDARD PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE REFERENCE
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date. 3/1/79
Title: Number: 008
Revision: 0
Routine Operation And Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
Prepared by ERT for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board Under
Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation And Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
1.0 Applicability
This procedure is to be used as a supplement to SOP 001, EQB Field Site
Routine Visit at those sites where ozone is measured with the Dasibi Model 1003-
PC Ozone Monitor. This SOP includes both routine operation and maintenance of
the instrument. There is practically no reason to remove the instrument from the
shelter since it is relatively easy to maintain.
2.0 Checks to be Performed Every Site Visit
Page 1 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 008
Revision: 0
2.1 Check that the shelter temperature is between 67°F and 78°F and that
the manifold pump is functioning properly.
2.2 Ozone Data Checks - Roll back strip chart to time of last visit, check
for any indications of noisy operation and verify chart time. Instru-
ment's zero offset should be recorded on strip chart.
2.3 Sample flow - The front panel flowmeter should read 2 1/min. Tap the
flowmeter to make sure the float is not stuck and is actually reading
the proper value.
2.4 Span - Turn the mode switch to SPAN, record the readout value from the
front panel. The first three digits of the display should agree with
the first three span set switches.
2.5 Analog span - With the mode switch still in SPAN, read the analog value
off of the strip chart recorder. If SPAN is 54.950 then the recorder
should read 9.50. If it does not, adjust to the proper value. A
record of SPAN numbers should be kept with all data to serve as a
reference should it ever be necessary to adjust data later.
2.6 Control Frequency - Switch the mode switch to CONTROL FREQ and record
the value. The reading should be between 23.0 and 28.0, if below 23.0,
adjust to 27.5 by repositioning detector. Refer to manual, Section 2.3.5.
2.7 Sample Frequency - Switch to SAMPLE FREQ. and record the value.
Reading should be between 35.0 and 48.0. If below 35.0 the optics need
to be cleaned.
2.8 Zero Check - Switch to ZERO. The zero offset pot should be at zero.
Check the recorder to make sure that it is actually recording zero. If
it is not, adjust the recorder zero or the instrument zero as described
in the operation section. If a zero adjustment is made repeat part 2.5
above.
2.9 Make sure all sample and manifold lines are connected as they should
be, especially if a calibration or repair has just been completed.
Check that the function switch is in the OPERATE mode.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation and Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
3.0 Monthly Checks
3.1 Measure power supply voltages on mother board:
+5VDC ±0.25V
±15VDC ±0.75V
±24VDC ±1.2V
±200VDC ±20V
3.2 Cycle time adjust. Check cycle time by observing each time the L.E.D.
in the upper left hand corner of the display flashes. It should be
more than 20 seconds and less than 30 seconds. If necessary, adjust R8
on the timing circuit board.
3.3 Measure temperature control voltage on mother board;
2.9VDC ±.2V (old style)
4.4VDC ±.2V (new style)
3.4 Adjust analog zero by connecting DVM to recorder output terminals. Put
mode selector switch in zero. Adjust recorder output with R3 on D/A
board.
3.5 Move mode switch to span. The first 3 digits of the display should
agree with the first three span set switches. Connect DVM to recorder
terminals. Voltage displayed on DVM should be the same as the last 3
digits on the analyzer display. (Example: span reading is 54.590.
DVM should read 9.50 volts ± .IV.)
3.6 Move mode switch to sample frequency. Reading should be between 35.0
and 48.0. If it is too high, adjust UV lamp. If it is too low, clean
optics. If it is still too low after the optics have been cleaned,
adjust the UV lamp. If the reading is too low after UV lamp has been
adjusted, the lamp should be replaced, (see manual)
3.7 Move mode switch to control frequency. Reading should be between 23.0
and 28.0. If it is either too high or too low, adjust control detector,
(see manual)
3.8 Move mode switch to operate. Disconnect power to valve and sample
pump. Make sure the zero offset swtich is at the zero position.
Remove the 3 jumpers on the logic board.
Observe the following sequence on the display.
a) Resets to zero and pauses.
b) Counts up to the present span number and pauses.
c) Counts down to some number close to .005 and pauses.
Allow the analyzer to complete several cycles. The displayed number
should not change more than ±2 digits. Find the average of the cycles
(ex: .049, .047, .046, .050, .049 « .048).
Page 2 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 008
Revision: 0
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Routine Operation and Maintenance of the Dasibi Model 1003
Ozone Analyzer
3.9 Subtract .050 from the average. (Ex: .048 - .050 + -.002.) This is
the analyzer zero offset. In this case it is -2PPB. Affix a card
displaying this number on the analyzer's front panel.
3.10 Reconnect power to sample pump and valve.
3.11 System Leak Check - Remove the sample line from the rear fitting and
hold your finger over the fitting opening. The flow, as indicated on
the rotameter, should drop to zero. If it does not, there is a leak in
the system which must be closed off.
3.12 Solenoid Valve Leak Check - Remove the scrubber. Block the ell connector
on the side of the solenoid where the scrubber was connected (your
finger will do). Watch the flowmeter and notice that the flow drops to
zero for 1/2 of the measurement cycle and returns to its original flow
for the other half.
Now block the tee on the other side of the solenoid where the other
side of the scrubber was connected and at the same time block the
sample inlet connector. If the flow does not drop all the way to zero,
there is a leak across the solenoid and it should be replaced.
3.13 Scrubber Efficiency Check - Turn on the built-in ozone source, direct
its output to the analyzers inlet, and adjust it until the monitor
reads between 0.5 and 1.0 ppm. The ozonator need not be stabilized for
this test so there is no need to wait for the source to warm up. Once
the instrument is reading ozone, switch the mode switch to SAMPLE FREQ.
When the instrument is reading sample frequency, record at least 5
consecutive readings in order to find a good average. After the last
reading, switch the ozonator off but leave the air flow on and take 5
more readings. Average these 5 readings and subtract the first average
from the number thus obtained. If you did not notice any drift in the
frequency while you were recording the numbers, then the difference
between the two averages represents how much ozone is contained in the
reference (zero) gas. The scrubber efficiency should be better than
96%. If not, replace scrubber.
3.14 Replace particulate filter.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
Page 3 of 3
Date: 3/1/79
Number: 008
Revision: 0
-------
STATUS/DATA ASSESSMENT SHEET
DASIBI MODEL 1003 03 MONITOR
Form 001-C
NETWORK:
STATION:
STATION NO.:
OPERATOR:
WEEK ENDING:
DATE:
LOCAL STANDARD TIME:
DATA
Valid Suspect Invalid
/ or NO*
SHELTER STATUS:
Temp. = 67° - 78°F?
Manifold Pump OK?
DASIBI DAILY CHECKS:
Sample Flow 2 £/min .
Span No. - 54.950
Control Frequency between
23.0 and 28.0
Sample Frequency between
35.0 and 48.0
Zero Offset Pot
Zero Check
Lines Connected Properly
DASIBI MONTHLY CHECKS
Mother Board Voltages
+5VDC ± 0.25V
±15VDC ± 0.75V
±24VDC ± 1.2V
±200VDC ± 20V
Cycle Time between
20 and 30 sec
Temperature Control Voltage
Analog Zero
Span = 54.950
Sample Frequency between
35.0 and 48.0
Control Frequency between
23.0 and 28.0
Determine Zero Offset
System Leak Check
Solenoid Valve Leak Check
Scrubber Efficiency >96%
Replace Particulate Filter
*Explanation of all NO entries should appear in field station log
-------
Appendix F
to the Final Report
Data Services Training Manual
-------
DATA SERVICES. TRAINING MANUAL
Data Services Training Program
developed by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the
PUERTO RICO ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY BOARD
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I Introduction
1. Purpose. 1
2. Specific Goals 1
II Stripchart Preparation and Interpretation
1. Definition of the Operating Network 2
2. Preparing Stripcharts for Digitizing 2-3
3. Chart Speed Changes and Other Time Discrepancy Problems 3-4
4. Interpretating the Stripcharts 4
5. Definition of Responsibilities in Handling Stripcharts 4-5
6. Figures 1-8 6-13
III Validation - General
1. Standard Operating Procedure 14
2. Review of Field Assessment Sheets 14
3. Documentation 14-15
IV Validation - Use of Calibration Data
1. Types of Calibrators 16
2. Examples of Multipoint Calibrations 16-21
3. Applying Results of Calibrations 22
4. Examples of Multipoint Calibration to Interpret 22-25
5. Interpretation of Calibrations in Item 4 above as done by ERT 22-31
Appendix A - Scientific Inventories and Reports Division Draft SOPs
-------
I' INTRODUCTION
1. Purpose
A Data Services Training Program has been developed for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board by Environmental Research & Technology, Inc. (ERT)
under a contract for the Environmental Protection Agency. The training program
covers the following areas:
1.1 Stripchart coding and interpretation.
1.2 Specific information concerning the processing of data from the
following instruments.
1.2.1 Thermo-Electron (Teco) Model 43 Pulsed Fluorescent S02
Analyzer
1.2.2 Dasibi Model 1003 PC Oj Monitor.
1.2.3 Bendix Model 8501-5CA CO Analyzer
1.3 Validation and Using Calibration results in the validation process.
2. The specific goals of this program are:
2.1 To define the basic steps in handling stripchart data.
2.2 To familarize students with data output from the various instruments.
2.3 To define documentation associated with validated data (traceable
data).
2.4 To familarize students with concepts concerning calibration results
and how they can be applied to the data.
3. An examination will be given at the end of the program. This will serve to
evaluate student performance.
Upon successful completion of this portion of the training program, the EQB
personnel will be prepared to develop the data organization structure required under
the aforementioned contract. ERT will digitize all data collected during the duration
of the 6-month program. While it is EQB's responsibility to validate the data, once
the program is completed, the stripchart digitizing responsibility is transferred to
EQB.
1
-------
II. STRIPCHART PREPARATION and INTERPRETATION
1. Definition of the Operating Network
In order to accurately read or interpret stripcharts it is necessary to
define the specifics of the operating network.
-What kind of data is being collected?
-How is it being collected?
-When was it collected?
ERT uses a task request form which is helpful in defining the network (See Figure
1 Form 1410-1 (2-77)). This type of form defines the details of the operation and
can be used to insure that all involved in the operation are aware of the specifics.
This form also serves as a reference for those people who are not directly involved
in the project but might occasionally need specific information. The most important
reason for using this type of form is that all the information needed to read and
code the stripcharts is contained on the two page form.
2. Preparing Stripcharts for Digitizing
2.1 Set up a log-in sheet for charts. Log them in when received from
field. Also make note when charts are shipped out or received back
after the initial log-in date (See Figure 2 Form 1603 (6/77).
2.2 Basic requirements for marking charts:
2.2.1 Chart should be labeled at the beginning and end with the
following information (See Figure 3).
START (or) END
Code of site and parameter
Inclusive dates on charts
2.2.2 Marking changes of data for each day (See Figure 4).
2.2.3 Marking of baselines, spans and areas of invalid data as
required by particular parameter SOP's. (See Figure 4)
2.2.4 Marking "Not to be Digitized" the inclusive questionable
period when span or baseline falls out of acceptable limit
as specified in particular parameter SOP. (See Figure 5 5 6)
2.2.5 Marking of beginning and ending times of periods of inter-
rupted service. (See Figure 7)
2
-------
2.2.6 On charts where time or recorder speed does not coincide with
that marked on chart, the actual (true) time must be marked
in increments not greater than 12 inches.
2.2.7 All pertinent information should be listed on stripchart coding
form (See Figure 8 Form 1111) and this form is to accompany chart
to digitizing.
3. Chart Speed Changes and Other Time Discrepancy Problems
3.1 There are essentially two time problems associated with recorders:
3.1.1 The recorder is advancing the paper at a speed greater or less
than the prescribed rate (1 inch/hour, 3 inches/hour, etc.).
3.1.2 The paper is intermittently "hanging up" although the drive
mechanism is moving at the proper speed.
3.1.3 Other problems include incorrect marking of the charts by the-
field technicians, power failures, no time at all marked by the
field technicians, and total "hang up" of recorders.
3.2 When charts are required to register .valid data for digitizing an histor-
ical network, it is essential that the proper times be indicated on the
charts. Whenever the printed chart times or dates do not coincide
with the times marked by the field technicians, the charts must be
remarked for digitizing. Two ways of determining correct chart times
utilize the following information:
3.2.1 Automatic calibartion should take place regularly at 24-hour
intervals. Locate two calibrations and measure the distance
in inches (or centimeters) between them.
If the distance between the calibrations is not the pre-
cribed interval (for example, 24 inches for 1 inch/hour
chart speed), try to determine what caused the discrepancy
(See 3.1). Measure other 24-hour intervals.
If the distance between calibration spans is constant, the
recorder is consistently fast or slow. Using a field
technician visit time that coincides with a printed time
(use previous week's chart if necessary), determine the ex-
act time of the calibration closest tn time to the visit.
Then determine true midnights, mark them on the chart, and
subdivide each day by at least every three hours. (Example:
if 24 hours = 25 inches, then 12 hours = 12.5 inches, 6
hours = 6.25 inches.)
It may be necessary to make different time adjustments on
different days if the recorder is gaining or losing at a
varying rate.
3
-------
. When all maTked times agree with station visit times, and/
or all calibrations occur in the same hour, the chart should
require no further time adjustment corrections.
If the distance between calibrations is constant and correct,
but field technician and printed times .do not agree, then
chart paper is simply not properly aligned with respect to
the printed times. A power failure or a field technician
error is probably the cause. Remark the chart midnights
correctly.
3.2.2 When dealing with charts where no regular calibration occurs,
only station visit times can be used as references. Measure
the distance between two station visit times and compare the
distance between two station visit times and compare the dis-
tance with the prescribed chart speed distance. (Example;
September 1, 10:45 AM to September 2, 11;35 AM. The elapsed
time is 24 hours, 50 minutes or 24.8 hours. If the chart speed
is 3 inches/hour, the distance should be 24.8 x 3 = 74.4 inches.
If, for example, the measured distance is 76.4 inches, the chart
has gained 2 inches or 40 minutes in a 24.8-hour period, about
1/2 inch in a 6-hour period, and 1/4 inch in 3-hours. Remark
the chart using 9 1/4 inches for each 3-hour interval, correcting
all midnights, and readjusting the correction factor as neces-
sary). One should verify that all times marked on the chart
agree with the field visit times.
3.2.3 All deviations from standard chart speed should be indicated
on the chart if it is going to be digitized.
4. Interpretating the Stripcharts
4.1 Prior to submitting the charts for digitizing, the data and all ap-
propriate documentation should be reviewed (See Appendix A SOP 16, 17
and 18).
4.2 All decisions on deleting of data and corrections for baseline adjust-
ments should be made and the stripcharts and coding sheets should be
marked appropriately (See 2.2).
5. Definition of Responsibilities in Handling of Stripcharts
5.1 Stripcharts coded by EQB personnel:
5.2 Stripcharts and coding sheets mailed to :
ERT
Data Services
696 Virginia Road
Concord, MA
by certified mail
5.3 ERT submits to Envirodata (Digitizing Subcontractor).
5.4 Envirodata returns data listings (and tape) to ERT (2 week turnaround).
4
-------
5.5 ERT Data Services personnel scan data listing to spot any gross digitizing
errors.
5.6 ERT Data Services mails data back to Puerto Rico by certified mail.
5.7 EQB subjects data to validation procedures.
5.8 EQB will report data to public and EPA as required by applicable
negotiations.
5
-------
Figure 1
Task Request Form
Requested by: Project No.
Date: Task No.
Client Name:
Network Name:.
State(s)
Start-up Date:.
Type of Monitoring:*
Field Consultant:.
End Date:.
Historical
. Other.
. Reduced Date Time Zone:.
Data Classification:* Unedited.
Data Capture Requirements:
Type of Data Capture:
, Validated.
Report to be Prepared by (Department and name of writer):.
Products Needed for Report(s).
Date Products Due:.
To Whom:.
'Please Circle Appropriate Classification(s)
Parameter
Engineering
Units
Format
1
Output Data Conversion
Type:
Constants3
Sensor Type
Recorder
Voltage
Chart
Speed
1 ".NNN", "N.NN", "NN.N", or "NNN."
2 "Linear" or "Log"
6a
3 Endpoints of linear scale eg.
"0 mph = OV"; "80 mp= 10V",
0 ~ .500 ppm scale with a 5% Baseline Offset
on the strip chart ".OOOppm =.5V"
",475ppm = 10 V"
-------
Figure 1 (continued)
Task Request Form (Cont.)
Network
and Site Code
Published Version of Site Name
Parameters
Parameter Codes
Necessary Information to Produce First Report
Full Site Name
State
Downwind
Direction
Distance
From Plant
Elevation
UTM Coordinates
Saroad Number
Staffing Requirements:
Authorized by:
1410-1 (2-77)
6b
Date:
-------
Figure 2
ID
Start
hr.
Inclusive
dates
*
End
hr.
field
log
sheets
(V)
date
rcvd.
Comments
Digitizing
date
out
date
ret'd.
1603 <6/77) 7
-------
Figure 3
7cck<\\CUW\'s> n>.
I.D. put on chart when
received from the field.
-------
Figure 6
C3
£3
G3»
G»
V39
C3B
CIO
CS£
CO
2L1QQ
icaa
C
CD
1600
i ¦ •
i • ¦
-c:
SgitM; ¦¦
N*sl.*t>v ;
~D
EU"
fto«. a.n-;
G9
'l33q.CS! >6-7*J
tS3 C CM4
J 2fc3-
t%?X
nd§^a0
rv^ i
ii
-------
i • I
—¦ . ¦ I — 4 ^ ,
wl) - - do -- 100 | |
Figure 5
' * t
1200
J
-------
Figure 4
¦ ' i f.v:::: .. j it™ ^
y
- - " - J
"LlZ-.-'Z- . ..
¦* -^j
... f
-
1 - J
W' moo:
^ h^° ^ • - •¦ - L "1 :¦-- --¦
- - t*(J
I
( — "i
.. 80 :r-.:. "ico
» \
i I '
?! ;
f r&
_: _. 0200 -
- " ¦ : 0$
¦ -I
'- •• VJ
to
_ioo
J? -~... l . .: -} piZr
:: swnn
11
11
! i
-------
i
1400
1 (ID
w
<>A '
*f 7 sbJZ
Dpr#
Due To
4.
p>ojen
'5
4[ft,Lone -
? ;
1
:*
.?
I
X
D3DQ
Vee-
04J, ¦
*£p
4P
A*\
tr\y I
Ca(trnxi\ - P/Oz.-/\/oa
'- Ctf3o.-C'f36
ws-ym st* tcp
-------
STRIP CHART CODING FORM
Chart f.D. Chart Range units ppm
Inclusive Dates Chart Speed Coder ••
1
c
).
ZE
FL
:rq
.AG
DATE
HR
ZERO (units)
SCALE (ppm/unit)
NEW ZERO (units)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
10
m
12
13
14
IS
16
17
IB
19
20
21
2£
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
43
46
47
48
49
50
SI
62
93
64
56
36
5T
38
3-,
60
s
S
s
s
,s
s
s
S
s
\
s
s
s
s
—
s
S
S
V
s
s
s
s
S
\
s
V
s
S
s
s
S
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
*
s
s
s
s
s
s
S
s
s
k
s
\
\
S
s
S
s
s
k
*
s
s
s
s
\
s
s
s^
V
s
'n
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
S
V
N
Sj
<
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
\
S
$
N
s
s
s
\
s
s
s
—
—
—
—
-
-
—
—
-
-
—
s
S
s^
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
SJ
k
\
S
s.
s
S
k
\
>
s
s
s
s
$
s
s
s
s
—
.
-
s
s
\
s
s
s
s
s
S
s
s
s
s
N
S,
s
S
s
S
s
<
s
<
v_
_ s
S
k
$
s
s
s
s
s
s
—
—
~
-
-
-
—
-
—
-
—
—
S
S
s
s
Sj
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
k
N
SJ
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
V
s
s
s
¦v
s
s
s
s
$
N
s
's
\
V
s
S
S
S
S
S
S
s
s
SI
s
s
s
s
s
"s
s
5
V
—
-
—
—
—
—
—
-
s
s
—
—
-
—
—
-
—
s
k
V
S
—
-
—
-
—
-
—
-
\
X
X
v
-
—
—
-
—
V
s
k
V
s
s
s
K
s
s
V
s
s
Is
s
s
s
k
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
k
s
N
\
V
V
S
v
si
\
V
>
s
s
—
s
s
\
—
s
s
V
N
s
s
V.
>
S
v.
s
>
c
\
X
S
—
—
—
"s
N
'v
>
s
\
is
s
S
S
>
s]
s
s
V
s
s
\
S
s
s
<
X
s
s
s
-N
s
-s
k
s
\
N
v:
s
>
£
s
s
s
s
s
S;
s
N
s
rs
S
S
S
S
s
s
s
s
*
S
\
s
s
Notes to the Diaitizei
n
k
S
S
k
s
s
k
s
s
s
s:
S
S
S
s
N
s
s
s
s
s
s
S
s
5:
s
s
s
S
s
s
s1
s
S1
S
S
S
S
*
s
s
s
s
s
s
S
s
s
$
S
S
s
SJ
s
s
Sj
s
s
s
s
s
s
s,
s
S
N
\
S
N
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
S
S
S
s
s
s
£
s
s
s
s.
s
s
'
S
S
S
S
s
N
'S
s
s
s
N
s
s
S
S
S
\
s
\
%
N
k
s
s
>
s
>
-------
III. VALIDATION - GENERAL
1. Standard Operating Procedures for Validation of Data (See Appendix A SOP 19)
u
2. Review of Field Assessment Sheets
Each field assessment sheet and daily log sheets filled out by the field techni-
cian upon each visit to a particular site, should be read carefully to note all
significant events which may have affected the operation of the sensors, and ulti-
mately the quality of the data being collected. The assessment sheets should be
checked to verify a particular sensor's serial number to verify that the sensor has
not been removed by the field technician. Also on the assessment sheets the field
technician should be writing the designated daily span values. Upon knowing the
designated spans one can determine whether the sensor is responding to a known
concentration accurately. The allowable deviation from the designated span values
is +15% after which if spans continue to be out of this range some corrective action
should be taken by the field technician.
On the right side of each assessment sheet the field technician must make an
evaluation of the data during the past week. The technician will label the data
as Valid, Suspect, or No Good. All suspect and no good data must be examined to.
determine whether the data should be kept as valid data or thrown out as invalid
data.
3. All significant events noted in the field log sheets having an effect on the sensor's
output should be documented along side the data. Examples of significant events are:
3.1 Whenever a sensor is installed or removed.
3.2 Anytime major maintenance is performed on the sensor or a significant
part of the sensor is removed.
3.3 Anytime data must be invalidated, an explanation of why the data is bad
must be documented along side the data.
3.4 All spans whether they are the daily auto spans or the weekly manual spans
should be documented along with the designated span values. If the desig-
nated span values change, this should be documented.
14
-------
3.5 All dates of multipoint calibrations should be documented along with the
results of the calibrations.
3.6 The serial numbers of all sensors should be documented on the data listings.
3.7 The date of the most recent calibration or the date the sensor was installed
which ever is most recent, should be documented on the data listings.
3.8 Whenever there are problems within the shelter which may have an affect on
the sensor, such as an air conditioner problem which may allow the temper-
ature within the the shelter to become extremely high or other problems
which may affect the sensors, this should be noted.
3.9 In summary, all problems with sensors which may cause invalidation of data
monitored, should be documented and all significant information which helps
justify data validation (i.e. calibration results, etc.) should be documented
on the data listings.
15
-------
IV. VALIDATION - USE OF CALIBRATION DATA
1. There are generally two types of calibrator used in the field, a permeation
tube calibrator "and a gas phase titration calibrator. Both calibrators are capable
of doing calibrations at four or five points along the range of the sensors. By
determining a sensor's output at four or five points, one can see non-linearity
and other significant deviations in a sensor's output. The calibration system is
set up in order that the sensor be kept as close as possible to the designated con-
centrations produced by the calibrators. When a sensor's output differs by more
than +10% from the designated concentrations, the sensor must be adjusted in order
to bring it closer to specifications.
2. Examples of Field Mulitpoint Calibration Results.
2.1 A & B - Examples of Teco 43 SO^ Analyzer Calibrations
16
-------
EQB
55f. Site
iis/N
S—0-
Netwnrk StfWyw f C**w»'
Calibrator: Type N/ anx n f'i-—:
DVM: Mfg and Model H***- &<>Z*> A
Figure 2.1A
Instrument Type H3 S/N *72(f — T P
Sfg7?70^fO-5 LastCal Date Temp: Des
.S/N o9Z73>/
Date "z/"?*?
C Obs "C
Last Cal Hate ^
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot,
Final: zero pot.
.span pot .
span pot
Setting
Flow
(l/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
... K 10%)
vD
<0-1OV)
ppmd
(D>*
Vo
(0-10V)
PPM0
(0)*
V
PPM0
V
PPMq
(0)*
Zero Air
0+.005
«
31*
sf. 13-*?°
0.&0
• Oto
o.zz-
.0 5**- •
-;3.3
1). S?
•05*
-337.
5*. f*C*>
/0 0
./0°
0 .?0
. o7*-
/•
3.*
-------
EQB
Network P ~ Site
Calibrator: Type S/N
DVM: Mfg and Model T/u fcc O^ro fl
Figure 2.IB
. Instrument Type
. Last Cal Date
leco S3
S/N
(,(. Z3- E7
Temp: Des
s/n
.°c
. Date
Obs ^
7/7^/75
. Last Cal Date
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot
Final: zero pot
. span pot
span pot
Setting
Flow
(l/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
/tBfwl«dRaaArt hl«tf
VD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)*
Vo
(0-10V)
PPM0
(O)*
V
PPMC
(O)'
V
PPM0 y
(or /
. •(< 10%)
Zero Air
0± .005
3
AO
OOO
/.O
O'OD
to
1—
OtbO
3
• 3
•335
-3.V7*
Y
fc.oju
S^C.
.2.33
-7^
•A
1
IM
G
v./p
•/5<*
V.o7
•IS3-
/•
c/,07
- v v/.
/o
;so
• o9o
3&I
./0b
+//«c
r-
3>*l
./OV
-*//.o /•
/V
•06I
2 33-
. O 4C
7-
.oik
r t
J
In-Stntinn Palihratnr R/N —" J *""* '*
S ebvi'affttVj
. +os
-------
2.2 A § B - Examples of Dasibi 03 Analyzer Calibrations.
19
-------
WIllLC lilllli I'igurc- 2.2A
Wright #31
/ .. —p q I'ii'Ul C.il i ltr.it ion P;isibi 1005 0.% Monitor
to-lr (t
Network :.)A/U{ Agr f$LufcF Station : ]/sI@I
Max. A =
(If A 10". Hcport to Supervisor)
V*k
5^6
lAfL
Comment:
20
-------
While Blull
Wright #31-
rigure 2.2N
lii'KI l!:i 1 ihr.it ion Risihi 1 ()().> ().% Monitor
Network: MUlT^jlL^F Sta t i on : W/?!(?// TT
Operator: j Hate: ~7"/ Z ~~ 79
S/N: ' 7(06 > r.ivr # : 2.Q 0.
Reason for Calibration:
i—
Max. rn A =
(If A x 10". Report to Supervisor)
03 Switch.
Position
nr.s.
PTM
m:s.
VOLT
OHS.
PPM
OHS.
VOLT
°.A
2/ON
_l0.sl
J
5/ON
,]88
C—
3,1k
-6-38r{
'1/ON
.21?
_ f
.5jJS_9
iM_.
—j
-
-3
S/ONI
JiQ.
2,tP_
\ -Z.27 *
(./ON
SAfc.
.42g
FINAL
PPM VOLT
Comment:
21
-------
3. Applying Results of Calibrations.
3.1 The following criteria are currently being used by ERT to validate all
all quality data. The criteria explained are the criteria used based on field
or pre- overhaul laboratory calibration results.
3.1.1 If a sensor is found to be with +15% of designated values, all
prior data (back to either when the sensor was installed or the
last multipoint calibration, whichever occured most recently)
will be accepted as valid data with no qualification needed.
3.1.2 If a sensor is found to be out of calibration by more than +15%
but less than *_ 40%, an attempt can be made to correct or adjust
prior data in order to bring it within the +15% validation guide-
line.
In order to adjust any data, a definite starting point must be
determined using daily spans, manual spans, significant sensor
adjustments or malfunctions, etc.).
If no definite starting point can be determined, all prior data,
back to either the last multipoint calibration, the sensor instal-
lation or a point at which the daily auto spans drop out of specs.,
will be qualified based on the calibration results.
3.1.3 When a sensor is found to be out of calibration by more than +40%
no attempt will be made to correct the data. In some cases a
qualifying memo will be sent with the data, but in other cases
where the sensor is grossly out of specs, data will be discarded
(999).
3.1.4 The above criteria are very general and much research must go into
each case to determine when or when not to adjust and discard data.
4. Examples of Multipoint Calibration to Interpret
4.1 Teco 43 calibration
4.2 Teco 43 calibration
4.3 Teco 43 calibration
5. Interpretation of Calibration in Item 4 above as done by ERT.
5.1
Teco
43
calibration
5.2
Teco
43
calibration
5.3
Teco
43
calibration
22
-------
EQB
Network
Site.
$-1
Calibrator: Type Tet^> 1*1 R/N Sft 12.11- 90- S
. Last Cat Date.
DVM: Mfg and Model S-Q3 O A
Figure 4-1
, InstrumentType Tiff o
S/N
7mi -o
. oC<
/.0(,
hZL
¦ 0(3
St ?lo
./OO
ft
.®9*
GL Ml
-------
EQB Figure 4-2
Network ^Wwnwif Site S — W Instrument Type
7*CO W3 _ S/N 72^ -9o
Calibrator: Typa^ColMS s/N SPC "73SC -?0- S I act Hal Date Temp: Des °C
F/wlU. A) S/N Q9J*7 I Last Cal Date
. Date
Obs.
skiing
DVM: Mfg and Model
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot.
Final: zero pot.
.span pot
span pot
Setting
Flow
(l/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
A'cfytWedRpfllfings
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
« 10%)
vD
. (0-10V)
ppmd
(D)"
Vo
(0-10V)
PPM0
(0)*
J£L*
;i*v i1 • ¦
DOM
WMg
V
PPM0
(0)*
Zero Air
0± .005
o
o
O
o
o
c?
sf rz.3t>
hZO
-oC^
A oC.
.043
% o*o
VSo
-
...
—
7. /"7
*
In-Statinn Pjilihratnr S/N
In-Statlon Calibrator Verification:
Avg. A% =>
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Setting
Analyzer Response
(D) *
Flow
Setting
Analyzer Response
(0)'
Volts
PPM
Volts
PPM
A%*
| TPJ.
I
>•
I
•A%
[V]
x 100
K±10%)
Signature
: Teck
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
-------
EQB
Network Site.
Calibrator: Type £2ki£*o_ S/N *"/ *3
Figure 4-3
Instrument T ypp"fg CO
Last Cal Date
W3
S/N
.Temp: Des
73
. Date
Obs.
3hh*
DVM: Mfg and Model *7? K. . 3/3
S/N _ Last Cal Date .
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot.
Final: zero pot
. span pot
span pot
Setting
Flow
(l/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
A3jTJ5t«4J3^aings
^tdbsT^Sy. '
n/ — » - t
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
« 10%)
vD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)*
vo
(0-10V)
PPM0
(0>*
7<>
1 -¦ v
**lulo
V
PPMq
(or
Zero Air
0+.005
1mm S' P®
1,00
• oS"&
.
.oVo
/./O
.OSS"
L+i 0
St- oo
./oo
/.STi
¦o7i
s.n
./off
rtjL *1*
VlOO
3-OI
. /si
llijk 97?
O
•3oO
•*/
-------
EQB
Figure 5-1
Network
Swirnif Comv^J
Site.
Instrument Type
Calibrator: Type IECO 143 s/N 5)* 7*7/ -Ga~S Last Cal Date.
DVM: Mfg and Model
r7gco 43
S/N.
.Temp: Des
72l/|-9o
S/N of2-7 22.t
Date .
: Obs
Last Cal Date
•>fcH
n/iv/ if
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot.
Final: zero pot.
. span pot,
span pot
RffhuiM-tjlV
Setting
Flow
(t/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
fiUjUULdJ|ggdings
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
« 10%)
!<
0 0
<
ppmd
(D)*
vo
(0-10V)
PPMq
(0)'
V
PPM„
(0)*
V
PPM0
(0)*
Zero Air
0±.005
0
O
0
Ca
O
O
O
0
sh tz&>
/. 30
• otS'
/,o t
• ©S\3
- /?.v
y.
/. 2,t
.045
-3-r/.
P.
• /DO
.0S3
~/7*
/»
M ^
•offr
-1.°%
GL 9-ifi
y, •
• ? «>X>
—
—
3^V
nn
-is A
QL
Cr.O O
.30^
. 2.4 3
—/2.-J
i"A
6-
•3«>V
+A37.
6L
. VS"0
— ¦
9.1°
>.vor
^vg! a% = 0« 6
librator Verification:
Reference Calibrator
(tfvStation Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D>»
\
Flow
Analyzer Response
(OP
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
6%*
TP1
TP2
•A%
x 100
«±10%)
Signature:
hitla/ tecU
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of ?
-------
¦ 5.1 (continued)
SrifijW
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY INC
MEMORANDUM
TO: J* Capobianco
MEMO NO.: 79-7.3618
FROM: Raymond C. Porter P"-E:
SUBJECT: Summit County, Patterson Park DATE. jujy 1979
(573H) Tcco 43 #7271-90
On May 15, 1979 a multipoint calibration was Hone which found the sensor
16"o low. The spanwfrom the time of the last multipoint on March 9, 1979
have been in specs until May 12, 1979 when they dropped low and out of specs.
Thus the data from May 12, 1979 to May 15, 1979 will be qualified as being
16% low.
RCP/jlc
cc: IV. McKinnon
L. Gendron
S. April
S. Nock
C. Locke
T. Gordon
1100-1(1-78)
tt
-------
EQB Fl8U"5 2
Network Swwiviil' £"ou*>/w Site ^ ^ Instrument Type S/N ^ ° Date ^/*75
Calibrator: Type 7*^-* /M^ S/N Sffc T3SI^trai nat» Temp: Des °C Obs ; °C
DVM: Mfg and Model T/vlCt. fr6Zo S/N °92"7 2 2. I Last Cal Date llftSl~7&
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot
Final: zero pot
. span pot
span pot
Setting
Flow
(i/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
AfjMgtedRpatfings
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
K 10%)
vD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)*
vo
(0-10V)
PPMq
(0)*
V
PPMq
(or
V
PPM0
(0)'
Zero Air
0+.005
—
O
o
o
o
o
O
e>
O
Sf 113 *
h3 0
to6'/~
ZOT-
./ 0/
+A«>
CL 9-Z1
015
.JLOD
—
—
-
V-Of
-a°h
*r?.o
CL 6/0
oX>
• 30 to
to
/ "'4-7
*/•
&. © &
•3*3
*/. o
?. o to
—
—
| -
9./"7
*/.9
AV*= -/7
vy.= ^
imh^
*~
In-Station Ca
In-Station Ca
lihratnr S/N
Avg*A% = ^"bS^/o
librator Verification:
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)»
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
o
*
*
TP1
r
TP2
•A%
K±10%)
[V]
Signature:
x 100
7ect\
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of
-------
EST
5.-2 (continued)
ENVIRONMENTAL nCSE ARCH i TECHNOLOGY INC
MEMORANDUM
TO: J- Capobianco
MEMO NO.: 7907-3618
FROM:. Raymond C. Porter
FILE:
SUBJECT: Summit County, Gregory St. (543H) DATE: ju]y 13^ 1979
Teco 43 W7245-90 SO2 analyzer
On May 30, 1979 a multipoint calibration was done which found the sensor
17.4v low. The spans since the last multipoint on April 14, 1979 have been
in specs until May 20, 1979 when they dropped low and out of specs. Thus
the data from May 20, 1979 to May 30, 1979 will be qualified as being
17.4% low.
RCP/jlc
cc: W. McKinnon
L. Gcndron
S. April
S. Nock
C. l.ocke
T. Gordon
1100-1(1-78)
29
-------
EQB
Network /tomboy Sfafl Site. g«f-U
Calibrator: Type ML9Sl>t> S/N _
DVM: Mfg and Model 7e *../»«=<¦ -ZfZ
Figure 5-3
. Instrument Type -ret
. Last Cat Date
H3
S/N
3/7/77
iciiih- ^ -
S/N _ Last Cal Date ^ Y ^
.Temp: Des
-9 O Date
°C Obs
-°C
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot.
Final: zero pot
.span pot .
span pot
Setting
Flow
(l/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
/THjuHltqjRsadfngs
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
.. « 10%)
VD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)#
Vo
(0-10V)
PPMq
(O)'
V
PPM0
(0)*
V
PPM0
(O)*
Zero Air
0±.005
/. 6 0
• OS'o
-po
r-
/./O
.OS'S"
*10%
2.0O
• / 00
/•5&
'07/
-PP
•A
2J-7
./op
r?%
N.|l| ?
0 ©
•
-------
5.3 [continued)
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH* TECHNOLOGY. INC
MEMORANDUM
TO:
T. Schoen
MEMO NO.:
FROM: L. Gendron
FILE:
SUBJECT: Harbor Beach; Ruth (1)
SO2 Data
DATE: July 5, 1979
A multipoint calibration was performed on the Teco 43 SO2 sensor at Ruth (1)
on March 7, 1979 and found the sensor to be 26% low. A previous audit on
February 20, 1979 also found the sensor to be 26% low at that time. All
spans since the last calibration on November 19, 1978 had been consistently
low, but due to the fact that the tech adjusted the ball heights on December
1, 1978 all spans can not be used to accurately determine the sensor's out-
put. Thus, all data from the last calibration on November 19, 1978 until
the calibration on March 7, 1979 should be qualified as possibly being as
much as 26% low.
LG/jlc
cc: K. McKinnon
S. April
S. Nock
C. DeFillippo
31
-------
APPENDIX A
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Date; July 24 1979
Title: Number: 015 *
Revision: 0
TECO 43 DATA REDUCTION AND VALIDATION-DRAFT
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 1 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure „ T, „
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Teco 43 Data Reduction and Validation-Draft Number: 015
Revision:
1. General/Responsibility
1.1 Sulfur dioxide (SC^) is a by-product of the burning of fossil fuels and one
of the contributors to air pollution in the vicinity of industrial facilities.
The SO2 analyzer used in the ERT installed EQB network is the Therrao-Electron
Model 43.
1.2 Data Modes and Formats
1.2.1 The voltage output of the Thermo-Electron Model 43 is linear with respect
to the sampled concentration of S02 and is calibrated in parts per million
(ppm) of SC^.
1.2.2 The instrument output is usually recorded in an analog mode at the test
site on a stripchart recorder, for example: Esterline Angus recorder
with a 0-10 volt scale, where 10 volts equals 0.450 parts per million
(ppm) when the instrument is set on the 0.5 ppm scale or 0.900 ppm
when the instrument is set on the 1.0 ppm scale. The baseline is set
at 1.0 volts and equals 0.000 ppm.
1.2.3 The digital programming format for Thermo-Electron SO2 is .NNN; para-
meter code is 3H; units, parts per million (ppm).
1.3 The data processing section, has the data reduction responsibility. The net-
work meteorologist has the validation responsibility.
2. Methods
2.1 All available data listings and correspondence should be obtained. These
include stripcharts, field log sheets, and data listing, digitized stripchart
data. Supporting documentation may also include telecons, trip reports, and
multipoint calibration sheets.
2.2 Stripcharts should be examined for the following problems. If any problems
have not been identified and acted upon by the field technician, a Problem
Sensor Communication (ERT Form 1151) should be filled out and given to
the supervisor.
2.2.1 Chart speed/time problems. Correct by using procedures defined in
Section II of Training Manual.
2.2.2 Baseline falling outside of 1.0+^ .2v. This should be brought to the
attention of the supervisor for possible data correction.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
I'WiK
-------
Page 2 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure _ . ,. 1Q7Q
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Teco 43 Data Reduction and Validation-Draft Number: 015
Revision:
2.2.3 Calibration span falling outside of +_ 15% of the designated value. The
designated span value may vary from instrument to instrument and can be
obtained from the field station Log Sheet at the time of the last field
multipoint calibration. Unstable performance of the instrument, char-
acterized by drifting baseline and poor calibrations may be due to the
high sensitivity of the Thermo-Electron SO? analyzer to moisture and
particulate matter. Field station Logs and Data Assessment Sheets
should be examined carefully for observations of such malfunctions.
2.2.3 Unusual chart traces, including, but not restricted to:
2.2.4.1 Steadily high or increasing values may mean shelter temperature
is climbing b°eyond accurate instrument function level. If the
field station log indigated air conditioner failure and shelter
temperature is over 80 F, data for that time period might be
invalid.
2.2.4.2 A long period of straight baseline (l.Ov.) data can be clean
air or an indication the analyzer was left in "zero" mode (not
sampling ambient air hence data invalid). Check chart and field
log for note to this effect, especially if other stations record
high values.
2.2.4.3 The ultraviolet bulb that is central to the operation of the
analyzer will occasionally burn out, resulting in a straight
trace at the bottom of the chart (0% of full scale).
2.2.4.4 Data which apparently exceeds the range of the instrument (that
is, the chart trace "pegged" at top of scale) may be retained,
but must be documented on all outputs and brought to the at-
tention of the supervisor.
2.2.4.5 Testing of equipment can result in a variety of unusual chart
traces. These periods should be clearly marked on chart by the
field technician. If the tests last for more than 40 minutes
of a given hour, that hour is invalid.
2.3 When using data listings to edit data, the following procedures apply:
2.3.1 Verify that the data listing agrees with the stripchart by checking 8-10%
of the hourly values (about two a day). The analyst will also check peak
values of the month and, in any case, all values above .100 ppm.
In the case of digitized data, any discrepancies between the stripchart and
data listing are due to errors in the digitizing process. Values on the
data listing that differ from the stripchart by more than one chart unit
should be replaced by a manually digitized value.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH &TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 3 of 3
Standard Operating Procedure n,
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Teco 43 Data Reduction and Validation-Draft Number: 015
Revision:
2.3.2 The final data listings should be documented with the following in-
formation:
-The observed values of all manual spans performed.
-The observed values for all all auto spans that are more than +15%
of designated values.
-The results of any multipoint calibrations performed should be attached.
-The reasons for missing hours.
-All suspect data. The network meteorologist will analyze each situation
to determine the validity of the data. (See SOP 019)
3. Example
3.1 Thermo-Electron stripchart indicating calibration span and drifting baseline.
3.2 Problem Sensor Communication Form
4. Quality Assurance Audits
4.1 The Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of the methods outlined in
Section II. Corrective action shall be taken necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord, Massachusetts 01742
1284b (12/76)
-------
ir
; j.t }T!^ j i ri ft!: 1:: Sfctt' •=
.. . H .ti . ij 1.l1 U- ¦
¦ T'-: I .
ill-TI
: A Hilit: iD00zrli. .|& :[• ffi i
-jSWSl -t
l.Lj£Lii
f
t*T;'
L; ; i, !
wrtiii.
HI: -J:
U4J4WUUOxmi"!l4:L!
|:.r7 *«j
'v;op t cfcrt. + :<
¦1— —I— ——. _ ,»«»V ¦ < tw' 1
liM.
pii.fci.ij:
EfcKi-j:
¦IT. .
1-r h< r£^":
m-1 to ji:
22i£kj
•»+• ¦ ' I ' I M . \
Figure 3.1
-------
Example 3.2
l ONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
Problem Sensor Communication
To-- Date.
From: Data Processing
Con. Realtime EU Chi. Realtime O Historical CD Other
Network ID Network ;
Station Parameter
Inclusive Dates To Instrument
Problem Definition
Signed
Action Taken
By.
Date
Problem Corrected As Of
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure n t
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Number: 016
Revision:
BENDIX 8501 DATA REDUCTION AND VALIDATION-DRAFT
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH g TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 6802-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC.
1284b (12/78)
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure T1 1Q7Q
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Bendix 8501 Data Reduction and Validation-Draft Number: 016
Revision:
I. General/Responsibility
1.1 Carbon monoxide (CO) is a by-product of incomplete combustion. It is produced
mostly by automobiles, but also by the burning of fossil fuels at industrial
facilities. The CO analyzer used in the ERT installed EQB network is the
Bendix Model 8501.
1.2 Data Modes and Formats
1.2.1 The voltage output of the Bendix CO monitor is linear with respect to
the sampled concentration of CO.
1.2.2 The instrument output is usually recorded in an analog mode at the test
site on a1stripchart recorder, for example: A recorder with a 0-10 volt
scale, where 10 volts equals 45.0 parts per million (ppm) when the instru^
ment is set on the 50.0 ppm scale or 90.0 ppm when the instrument is set
on the 100.0 ppm scale. The baseline is set at 1.0 volts and equals
00.0 ppm.
1.2.3 The digitizing programming format for Bendix CO is NN.N; parameters
code is 34; units parts per million (ppm).
1.3 The data processing section has the data reduction responsibility. The
network meteorologist has the validation responsibility.
II. Methods
2.1 All available data listings and correspondence should be obtained. These include
stripcharts, field log sheets, and data listing of digitized stripchart data.
Supporting documentation may also include telecons, trip reports, and multipoint
calibration sheets.
2.2 Stripcharts should be examined for the following problems. If any problems have
not been identified and acted upon by the filed technician, a Problem Sensor
Communication (ERT Form 1151) should be filled out and given to the supervisor.
2.2.1 Chart speed/time problems. Correct by using procedures defined in Section
II in Training Manual.
2.2.2 Baseline more than +_ .2 volts out of designated (1.0 volt). This should
be brought to the attention of the supervisor for possible data correction.
2.2.3 Calibration spans falling outside of + 15% of the designated span. The
designated span value can be obtained from the data assessment sheet or
the last valid multipoint calibration sheet. Any periods for which the
spans are not within these specifications should be noted on the data
listing and reviewed by the meteorologist for possible data action.
2.2.4 Any long periods of straight data that nay indicate a recorder problem or
if the data is at the bottom of the scale (l.Ov), the instrument may have
been left in baseline mode (not sampling ambient air) or the infrared light
source may have burnt out. These problems would invalidate the data for
the time period involved.
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Bendix 8501 CO Data Reduction and Validation-Draft
•
2.2.5 Data which apparently exceeds the range of the instrument (that
the chart trace "pegged" at top of scale) may be retained but must
be documented on all outputs and brought to the attention of the
supervisor.
2.2.6 Testing of equipment can result in a variety of unusual chart
traces. These periods should be clearly marked on the chart by the
field technician. If the tests last for more than 40 minutes of a
given hour, that hour is invalid.
2.3 When using data listings to edit data, the following procedures apply:
2.3.1 Verify that the data listing agrees with the stripchart by checking
8-10% of the hourly values (about two a day). The analyst will
also check peak values of the month.
In the case of Digitized data, any discrepancies between the
stripchart and data listing are due to errors in the digitizing
process. Values on the data listing that differ from the strip-
chart by more than one chart unit should be replaced by a manu-
ally digitized value.
2.3.2 The final listings should be documented with the following in-
formation:
-The observed values of all manual spans performed.
-The observed values for all auto spans that are more than ^15%
of designated values.
-The results of any multipoint calibrations performed should be
attached.
-The reasons for missing hours.
-All suspect data. The network meteorologist will analyze each
situation to determine the validity of the data. (See SOP
019)
III. Example
3.1 To be added during training session. (Normal trace from instrument)
3.2 Problem Sensor Communication Form
IV. Quality Assurance Audits
4.1 The Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of the methods outlined
in Section II. Corrective action shall be taken as necessary.
Page 2 of 2
Date: July 24, 1979
Number: Q16
Revision:
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. <86 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
IJUh 119/781
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC
Problem Sensor Communication
To: Date.
From: Data Processing
Con. Realtime CH Chi. Realtime CI Historical CD Other
Network ID Network
Station Parameter
Inclusive Dates To Instrument.
Problem Definition
Signed
Action Taken
By Date Problem Corrected As Of
l-ADDRESSEE FILE COPY
ERT FORM
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure Dale! July 24 _ m9
Title: Number: 017
Revision:
DAS1BI DATA REDUCTION AND VALIDATION-DRAFT
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH 5 TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No, 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC
1284b (12/7Bt
696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
-------
Page 1 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Dasibi Ozone Data Reduction and Validation-Draft Number: 017
Revision:
I. General/Responsibility
1.1 Ozone (03), the main constituent of petro-chemical smog, is one product of the
chemical reaction produced when certain auto emissions, hyrocarbons and oxides
of nitrogen are exposed to sunlight.
One Ozone Monitor used in the ERT installed EQB network is the Dasibi Ultra-
violet (UV) Ozone Monitor, Model 1003. It is a self-contained instrument which
measures gaseous ozone by UV absorption.
1.2 Data Modes and Formats
1.2.1 The Voltage output of the Dasibi is linear with respect to the sampled
concentration of O3 and is calibrated in parts per million (ppm) of O3.
1.2.2 The instrument output is recorded in an analog mode at the test site
on a stripchart recorder, e.g: A recorder with a 0-10v scale where 10
volts equals .500 ppm. The baseline is set at O.Ov and equals 0.0 ppm +
the instrument offset.
1.2.3 The digital programming format for the Dasibi O3 is .NNN; parameters
code is 3G; units, parts per million (ppm).
1.3 The data processing section, has the data reduction responsibility. The network
meteorologist has the validation responsibility.
II. Method
2.1 All available data listing and correspondence should be obtained. These include
stripcharts, field log sheets, and digitized stripchart data. Supporting docu-
mentation may also include telecons, trip reports, and multipoint calibration
sheets.
2.2 Stripcharts should be examined for the following problems. If any problems have
not been identified and acted upon by the field technician, a Problem Sensor
Communication (ERT Form 1151) should be filled out and given to the Supervisor.
2.2.1 Chart speed/time problems. Correct by using procedures defined in
Section II of Training Manual.
2.2.2 Dasibi Ozone monitors should not display a significant baseline drift.
Drift of more than 1 chart unit 0.0 +_ .2v should be brought to the
attention of the supervisor for possible data correction.
2.2.3 The designated span of calibration depends on the network. A deviation
of more than + 15% by the observed span of calibration should be brought
to the attention of Field Services by using a Problem Sensor Communi-
cation (ERT Form 1151). The Problem Sensor Communication should be
given to the supervisor, who will forward it to the appropriate party.
With the Dasibi Monitor, the calibration span well within specifications
is a good indication of a properly functioning instrument.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1J84b (12/78)
-------
Page 2 of 2
Standard Operating Procedure n ,. 1Q7Q
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Dasibi Ozone Data Reduction and Validation-Draft Number: 017
Revision:
2.2.4"* Over the course of a calendar year, the maximum hourly average
concentrations of ozone should occur in the summer months, and
usually during the middle of hot, sunny days.
Regardless of the time of year, maximum hourly concentrations for any
given day should also primarily occur in the middle of the day.
Any prolonged period of data below .005 should be regarded as suspect
and the meteorologist should be consulted.
Any discrepancies found should be noted on the data listing and on a
Problem Sensor Communication (ERT Form 1151) to be given to supervisor.
The Supervisor or Network Meteorologist will further investigate the
problem.
2.3 When using data listings to edit data, the following procedures apply:
2.3.1 Verify that the data listing agrees with the stripchart by checking
8-10% of the hourly values (about two a day). The analyst will also
check peak values of the month and, in any case, all values above .100
ppm.
In the case of Digitized data, any discrepancies between the stripchart
and data listing are due to errors in the digitizing process. Values
on the data listing that differ from the stripchart by more than one
chart unit should be replaced by a manually digitized value.
2.3.2 The final data listings should be documented with the following in-
formation:
-The observed values of all manual spans performed.
-The observed values for all auto spans that are more than *_ 15% of
designated values.
-The results of any multipoint calibrations performed should be attached.
-The reasons for missing hours.
-All suspect data. The network meteorologist will analyze each situ-
ation to determine the validity of the data. (See SOP 019)
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
III. Example
3.1 Dasibi stripchart showing ideal functioning of instrument. (To be added.)
3.2 Problem Sensor Communication Form.
IV. Quality Assurance Audits
4.1 The Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of the methods outlined
in Section II. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC.
Problem Sensor Communication
To: Date.
From; Data Processing
Con. Realtime [D Chi. Realtime D Historical D Other
Network ID Network_
Station Parameter
Inclusive Dates To Instrument
Problem Definition
Signed.
Action Taken
By Date Problem Corrected As Of.
I-ADDRESSEE FILE COPY
-------
Page of
Standard Operating Procedure _ T, _ 1Q,0
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Number: 019
Revision:
DATA VALIDATION-DRAFT
Prepared by
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH § TECHNOLOGY, INC.
for the Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board
under Contract No. 68-02-2542
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/78)
-------
Page 1 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure _ T, ,Q,o
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Data Validation-Draft Number: 019
Revision:
1. GENERAL
1.1 Definition
A set of data representing the measurement of a specific physical
quantity is defined to be valid if the instrument system appropriate
for the project purposes is in normally good operating condition and
is adjusted to conform to calibration specifications established for
the particular contract.
1.2 Instrument System
Selection of the appropriate instrument system will have been
determined and specified by an instrument system Project Engineer to
satisfy project requirements. He will also assure that installation,
calibrations, and operational procedures are adequate to maintain the
required quality of measurement. Any exceptions to standards speci-
fied in current SOP's will be explicitly defined and documented by
the Director of the Air Sampling Division.
1.3 Calibration Standards
It is generally required that the calibration system maintain a
traceability to National Bureau of Standards reference sources.
(Reference to CFR (40-58). Scheduled field calibration tests and
instructions governing replacement or readjustment are covered by
appropriate SOP.
1.4 Documentation
Complete records are considered essential to support all decisions
regarding the quality and validity of data because of the possibility
of formal review in legal proceedings or scientific conclusions.
1.5 Validation Process
Formal validation consists of a review of all evidence relating to
conditions affecting data acquisition, instrument calibration, data
processing, data correction, and data deletion. The data will be
evaluated for reasonableness and consistency with other measurements.
Records will be assessed for clarity and completeness. Valid data
will be authorized for retention in the EQB data base, and the data
lists released to the public will be formally stamped VALIDATED.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY. INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD, CONCORD, MASSACHUSETTS 01742
• HUK 119/781
-------
Standard Operating Procedure
Title: Data Validation-Draft
1.6 SOP Applicability
This Data Validation procedure is applicable to the EQB/ERT installed 6
station where the primary responsibility for data validation is assigned
to EQB Scientific Inventories and Reports Division.
2. REPONSIBILITIES
2.1 The Scientific Inventories and Reports Division Manager is responsible for the
assignment of qualified personnel to process, edit, and validate field data
from all projects assigned to the division and is responsible for technical
review of the editing and validation actions.
2.2 An air quality meteorologist is generally assigned the responsiblity of valida-
tion. Exceptions to this rule may be made by the Scientific Inventories and
Reports Division Manager for some types of instrumentation and special projects.
The validator may seek consultation and advice from other qualified technical
personnel but he must apply his own judgment on the validation decision.
2.3 The analyst responsible for processing and editing the data will provide written
documentation describing conditions relating to data which is suspect, corrected,
or voided due to instrument malfunction.
2.4 The responsibility for review of validation judgment and decisions moves up-
ward through the direct supervisory and management hierarchy as defined by
current organization charts.
3. INTERFACE WITH OTHER ORGANIZATIONAL ELEMENTS
3.1 The controlling interface for definition of project requirements is via the
EQB director of Air Monitoring Division. As a general rule his instructions
should be transmitted in written form or, if verbal, should be confirmed in
writing. Instruction can include special tolerance limits for individual
projects based upon requirements imposed by the clients and regulatory agencies.
3.2 Organizational elements responsible for calibration, maintenance, and opera-
tion of the project instrumentation system will transmit data to Scientific
Inventories and Reports Division along with pertinent and required forms,
instrument logs, and calibration data. They will respond to requests from
this division for additional information required to support validation.
3.3 Engineering and instrument quality personnel will be consulted as necessary
for technical information and advice concerning instrumentation performance.
Page 2 of 4
Date: July 24, 1979
Number: 019
Revision:
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1264b (12/78)
-------
Page 3 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure n T, lft,„
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Data Validation - Draft Number: 01?
Revision:
4. METHOD
Since validation is the product of the review and technical judgment of the
validating meteorologist, the method consists of guidelines rather than a
series of rigid steps. Characteristics peTtaining to specific parameters or
specific instruments are described in those applicable SOP's
4.3 The validator should be cognizant of the purpose and requirements of the
specific project for which the data is being presented.
4.2 The validator should review the instrument calibration records for schedule,
completeness and conclusions. Daily span calibrations should be reviewed
on applicable instruments.
4.3 The validator should review and assess all information noted by the data
analyst on the data lists.
4.4 The validator should review stripcharts, field log sheets, and data assessment
sheets to evaluate instrument operation for all suspect data periods.
4.5 The validator can check reasonability of some parameters by comparing data
with that form nearby National Weather Service stations or other data sites.
4.6 The validator may consult with engineering or instrument quality personnel
to help resolve questionable instrumentation performance.
4.7 Data should be voided only if there is convincing evidence that it is not
valid.
4.8 Corrections are applied to data only if there is convincing technical justi-
fication that there was an instrumentation system bias. The basis for cor-
rection should be fully documented.
4.9 The validator should document on the final data list all pertinent information
which supports his judgement regarding the validity of the data.
4.10 If an air quality instrument is operating properly and calibration data show
output of _+ 15%, the data can be validated without qualification. If the
instrument calibration is outside the 15% value, the data may be validated
with the qualification recorded on the final data listing.
4.11 Each validated data listing will be stamped with a validation seal and will b«
dated and initialed by the validator and data analyst responsible foT the
determination. This should only be accomplished after all deletions and
changes have been made as shown by comparison with a data list. The final
data list will also be stamped and initialed.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 Virginia road, concord. Massachusetts 01742
1384b (12/78)
-------
Page 4 of 4
Standard Operating Procedure n , , „ ln,n
Date: July 24, 1979
Title: Data Validation - Draft Number: 019
Revision:
5. QUALITY ASSURANCE AUDITS
5.1 The Quality Assurance Officer shall conduct audits of the methods out-
lined in Section 4. Corrective action will be taken as necessary.
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH & TECHNOLOGY, INC. 696 VIRGINIA ROAD. CONCORD. MASSACHUSETTS 01742
1284b (12/781
-------
Appendix G
the Final Report
Audit Report
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH ft TECHNOLOGY. INC
MEMORANDUM
TO: DISTRIBUTION
MEMO NO.: 079GNG-285
FROM: A. Sacco
FILE:
SUBJECT: Audit of EQB/ERT Monitoring
Network
DATE: 10/23/79
During the week of October 15-19, 1979, I conducted a performance
Audit of the Ambient Air Monitoring Network established by ERT for the
Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board (EQB) through a basic ordering
agreement with Region II of the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
EQUIPMENT - A Thermo Electron (TECO) Model 143 Permeation Tube Calibrator
S/N 7529-93 employing a 5 cm S02 NBS permeation tube S/N48-31
was used to generate the audit concentrations of S02.
CO was generated by volumetric dilution of a vendor certified
tank of CO in air (508 ppm). Dilution was provided by bottled
air located at the site and both air and CO flows were metered
by means of an ERT Mass Flow Controller Dilution System,
S/N 1101G. 0- concentrations were generated by means of an
ERT built 0_ generator 1106T, which had been previously verified
against the ERT laboratory standard UV photometer. This unit
was employed in conjunction with the dilution system 1101G and
an ERT built zero air system to provide various 0^ concentrations.
Hi Vols were calibrated using a standard calibrated orifice S/N 3092
in conjunction with a series of five resistance plates.
A meeting was held at the EQB laboratory on October 16, 1979, to discuss
the conduct of the audit. Present at the meeting were the following:
It was decided that we would perform Audits at sites #7 (SO-J, #9 (CO),
and #12 (0 ) on October 16. We would finish the north shore sites of
#19 (S0_) and #27 (SO.) on October 17 and finish with audits of the South shore
#15n(S02), TSP an2 #14 TSP on October 18. During the October 16 audit, I was
accompanied by J. Spittola, Casto Velazquez-US-EPA-SJ, H. Diaz, and I. Matos.
On October 17 I was accompanied by J. Spittola, Oswaldo Vazquez-EQB Field Technician,
and I. Matos. On October 18, I was accompanied by I. Matos and William Alicea-EQB
Electrical Field Technician.
Joseph Spittola - USEPA Region II
Nelson Moreno - PR-EQB
Israel Matos - PR-EQB
Hector Diaz - ERT
Anthony Sacco - ERT
1100-1(1-78)
-------
A. Sacco
Memo No. 079ENG-285 page 2
RESULTS: Table 1 indicates a summary of the audit results (note that Hi Vols
were calibrated and not audited). Attached to this report are copies of the
data sheets associated with each analyzer audit. The network is operating well
and is being attended with sufficient frequency and the performance audit results
indicate that analyzers are operating well. There is a fine working relationship
between EQB and the ERT representative H. Diaz. I enjoyed excellent cooperation
with all EQB personnel.
Although the program has started well, there are several areas which
indicated potential problems.
o Most of the sites suffer from some form of moisture condensation
within the inlet probe system. The Bayaman site, #19, was the worst.
At this site there was water all through the inlet line to the TECO 43,
even on the particulate filter. There are several suggested actions
which can alleviate this problem. The simplest action requires
careful wrapping of all inlet lines with an insulating material. In
conjunction with this, the shelter thermostat may be raised slightly
so that the environmental temperature is above the dew point most
of the time. This can be tricky where a calibrator such as the TECO 143
Permeation System is used, since it employes a 30°C oven and requires a
Delta T of 5°C to operate efficiently. If these things fail to solve
the condensation, it may be necessary to shorten the inlet Teflon
probe leading to the glass manifold so that there is a minimum length
of sample probe inside the shelter.
o The network is plagued by power interruptions which cause data problems.
While there isn't much we can do about power problems, we can make them
easier to identify. The Esterline Angus Miniservo Recorder which is in
use at all the SO. sites and the 0, site as well, has a standard
rechargeable battery pak option (about $150) which can operate the
recorder for at least 8 hours. I suggest that installation of this
option be implemented to improve the efficiency of data processing.
o Span checks are performed on a weekly basis. If there is a problem
where an analyzer span is found out of tolerance, a week of data may
be invalidated. Each of the SO. Analyzers is equipped with the necessary
valves to accomodate an automatic zero and span cycle. The expense
associated with implementing auto zero/span cycles requires the purchase
of timers and relays. The cost is probably less than $200 per unit and it
improves the potential for quality data.
o The San Juan CO site #9 is too close to the roadway for valid sampling.
It is approximately 10 meters from the road and should be at least
twice that. The inlet probe appears to be higher than the 3+1/2 meters
required also. This site should be moved to a better location. It
does not appear that it can be conveniently moved further back at the
present site without being impacted by other obstructions.
o Since the equipment in this network is relatively new, there has not
been much problem with spare parts, but indications are that this could
be a significant problem in the future. A complete stock of spare
components (a one year supply) should be made available and updated as used.
-------
A. Sacco
Memo No. 079ENG-285 page 3
o Documentation at the sites is adequately performed, but the mechanics
of this phase of the operation is cumbersome. The daily log sheets
and assesment sheets are completed with an original and two loose
carbon copies. This is a pain in the neck at least. The forms should
be printed on multiple NCR stock for more convenience. There is also
no convenient filing place for these forms at each site. This will be
a real mess before too long. It would be advisable to start a three
ring binder for this purpose at each site where all documentation,
including calibration sheets could be easily stored.
o The problem of personnel turnover within the EQB is the largest single
factor which could be a determinant to the continued efficient
operation of this network. It is not sufficient to rely upon exsisting
technicians to train new people since this tends to dilute the effort .
afteT a period of time. A comprehensive training program must be
established either by outside contract or by using EQB people who are
expressly trained for this task.
o Although there is a Quality Assurance Program associated with this
network, it was devised as a guideline document and EQB is under
no obligation to implement it. This plan does not include all areas of
concern in this network specifically high volume samplers etc.
EQB should either adopt/modity the current plan or develop a plan.
o Although there is not much data to validate as yet, there seems to be
a lack of staff for this function. At the present time there is only
.one person actively involved in this task. There is a requirement for
at least a meteorologist to validate data.
o The current operation is adequately serviced without laboratory
calibration standards, but in the near future the expanded network
will require at least a standard for SC^.
AS/ch
Distribution:
J. Kruse
E. Fasci
A. Costales
J. Wilbur
K. Detore
S. Whittimore
H. Diaz-Puerto Rico
Anthony
Attachments
-------
TABLE 1
EQB/ERT MONITORING SITES
SITE
Name
SITE
No.
Parameter(s)
Date of Last
Span Adjust
Delta %
Monitoring
Equipment
Guaynabo
7
S°2
9/27/79
-7.3
Teco 43-Pulsed
Fluorescence
San Juan
9
CO
10/10/79
-6.8
Bendix-NDIR
Toa Baja
12
°3
(2)
+1.2
Dasibi-UV Photometr)
Bayamon
19
S02
10/10/79
+2.4
TECO 43 Pulsed
Fluorescence
Levitown
27
S°2
10/15/79
-3.1
TECO 43 Pulsed
Fluorescence
Guayama
15
so,,
TSP
9/21/79
N/A
-5.2
(1)
TECO 43 Pulsed Fl.
Sierra Hi Volume
Sampler
Guanica
14
TSP
N/A
CD
Sierra Hi Volume
Sampler
^Calibrations were performed at the two Hi Vol sites since these sites were
newly installed and had not been previously calibrated.
^This analyzer had been set up according to factory specified span values and
had not been previously challenged with an independent 0^ reference source.
^This analyzer had just been installed at the site on 10/15/79.
-------
Network^^S/ T~ Site & u by ft Instrument Type *^2 S/N ? ~//(*> ^
Calibrator: Typp ~Tf»< ° /V2 s/N 7 "7 C>5~V > Last Cat Date
Date /0
0bs_i£O—_°C
/o-/- Jg,
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zero pot ^^_P_
Final: zero pot
span pot
span pot
4*3
/hsp> TowL
Flow
Setting
Flow
(jl/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
L%*
(< 10%)
vD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D»-
vo
(0-10V)
ppm0
(0)*
V
PPM0
(0)*
V
PPM0
(or
Zero Air
0±.005
£>.00
0. JO
-.(?/
. o-o c'i
M • W)
/. 7^
'r.
DVM: Mfg and Model Sold S/N O L7 O&M 7 Last Cal Date /Q-l-~>c/
Complete where Applicable: Initial: zcrn pot % .span pot JL52 ^ *- p JT /3~
o.itf
9. C, OJ
z.q/
/. 6
.0Z
o. oiz
— 9.o^o
A
In-Station Calibrator S/N 4¦&/O S* C S ~/0
In-Station Calibrator Verification:
Avg. A% = - 73
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)*
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
A%*
TP1
TP2
"6%
«±10%)
¦[V]
Signature:
x 100
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
1772 (12/78)
-------
Network Sitg •I*'Art Instrument Type AP J iC S/N ¦2*/Z&>9 Date A"1 ~/( ' ? ^
Calibrator: Typa f?d.T S/IM / /Q / (Z I act n«l natP S- ~ C - ~?9 Temn: Des °C Obs °C
DVM: Mfg and Model FL^C sj-QMO /t S/N O L '7 0 5'^7 Last Cal Date /P 9
Comolete where Annlinahle: Initial: 7prn pnt Jt/ 92.
span pnt 5"
s¥*j);r
£?/vL
-Final* 7prr» pnt
«pan pnt
Flow
Setting
Flow
(il/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
« 10%)
VD
-te-iov>-
ppmd
(D)*
tiZ&JP'
| lr IU V f
PPM0
(O)'
V
PPM0
10)'
V
PPM0
(0)*
Zero Air
0±.005
Z-gno
0.0 0
67y c?
i'JW
i (3 LO,
/
-/0.2
In-Statinn ralihratnr S/N
In-Station Calibrator Verification:
Avg. A% = «¦ (o . £
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)*
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
A%"
TP1
"
'
TP2
»A%
-M
X 100
«±10%)
Signature:
C7-
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
1772 (12/78)
-------
Network Site J. Instrument Type I S/N '
Calibrator: Type S/N //° & T^ilO/ G Last Cal Date S"/&/Temp: Des A>A
.Date /0^/£/7f
ntv: /V /l
DVM: Mfgand Model
0.0 G
efyP b
H3.0
f.OO 6
•sc 7 *
.MTU
,H17
0.?O(e
"VV7
320
" it
» 403
, 3V2>
£).
*3.7°/j
f/O
'/
>2y~&
. Arc
O.lol
'/v?
-2. «5&
-------
+/f
Network J Site So* Instrument Type TTTco S/N
Calibrator: Type Tacq juZ S/N 93 Last Cal Date fr~-2/-7f Temp: Des ££.
. Date '•//?/??
0bs_^£Z2_°C
DVM: Mfg and Model
. S/N OL 7 O5~V Last Cal Date /0-I- 7 9
Complete where Applicable: Initial:
7«rn pnt
«?pan pnt & ^
/? -PyT
Final:
zero pot
span pot
Flow
Setting
Flow
(jl/min)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
« 10%)
VD
(0-10V)
ppmd
(D)«
v0
(0-10V)
PPM0
(OJ#
V
ppm0
(0)*
V
PPMq
(or
Zero Air
0±.005
?.<;*¦ O
0 . 0^
CP.oO
— 0.0 /
17 US?
/. 1 $
%.o
O.HV
8.3.6"
O.H 13
+3./?o
9*Tl6 >
*t. 73"
JO
O ,/6"
O./Sf*
4+ %
7 6 t-s;
S.9'
/.6>
0.0?
/. (a0
0 .OS
0
In-Rtatinn Hal ihrat nr R/N 5 J 0 9
In-Station Calibrator Verification:
Avg. A% = + 5 .y
Reference Calibrator
In-Station Calibrator
Flow
Analyzer Response
(D)'
Flow
Analyzer Response
(0)*
Setting
Volts
PPM
Setting
Volts
PPM
TP1
TP2
*A%
¦ [V]
x 100
«± 10%)
Signature:
iSZ
Q.C. Review
Accepted ~ -Rejected ~
Page 2 of 3
1772 (12/78)
-------
EST *2?
Network ffi-T' Site LSVi Tc\.u nj Instrument Type T£c. c V.3 S/N S t> )J-Jo/ Date /c> -/ 7~ ? ?
Calibrator: Typn TBco 1^3 S/N f-£ I act rai r>atP X-3J- ~)9 Temp: Des S° °C Obs -^C* °C
DVM: Mfgand Model FlvK£ XO*c> /» S/N O Last Cal Date ?fl_
Complete where ADplicahln: Initial: 7ern pnt V40
cpan pnt /
Final: zero pot
span pot ,
Flow
Setting
Flow
(nVmin)
Input Concentrations
Unadjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
Adjusted Readings
(Obs)
A%*
« 10%)
! <
o o
<
ppmd
(D)*
Vo
(0-10V)
PPMq
(0)*
V
PPM0
(0)*
V
PPMq
(0)*
Zero Air
0±.005
zetio
0.OO
0. O'O
0.0*1
o.oof
H I fc)
J. IS
8.0
o .4*
7.75
0.3??
?. y>'\&)
4.7S
3.0
o./s*
o.my
9-iS)
8.9/
/6
ooS
t..70 and the Acfm> 20.
4. Sample time must be within 1 60 mina. of 24 hn.
5. To calculate flow criteria: compute 15 cfm of the initial
average and ± 10 cfm of the final average. The final flow
should not exceed the initial by > 3 cfm.
6. The final flow should be greater than 20 cfm.
70
60
50
t
o
- 40
30
?0
10
II
t
z
\i
*
i£
Init
1
2
3
4
Flows
Avg
S3
i
Final
"2^
t
For LAB use only
Effective Dates
Begin Curve.
Retro to
End Use
Approved
White • Concord
Yellow • Shelter
Pink - District Offi
to
.25
« 4 t« *
OrS-
SO
Magnehelic Gage Reading (OBS)
4r25
/O
-------
TECHNICAL MliPORT DATA
(I'lraif read hiunictions on the reverie before completing)
1. FlEPORT NO.
EPA 902/4-80-001
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
Environmental Monitoring Training Program developed by
Environmental Research 5 Technology for the Puerto Rico
Environmental Quality Board
7. AUTHOH(S)
Hector R. Diaz
Edward W. Fasci
3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
5. REPOMT DATE
March 1980
6. performing organization code
ERT P-7421
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
Environmental Research 5 Technology, Inc.
696 Virginia Road
Concord, Massachusetts 01742
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
BOA 68022542
12. SPONSORING AGENCYyMAME AND ADDRESS
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region II
26 Federal Plaza
New York. New York 10007
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
Final
14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
16. ABSTRACT
ABSTRACT
This report presents the results of a training and monitoring operations program
conducted in Puerto Rico by ERT in conjunction with the Puerto Rico Environmental
Quality Board (EQB). Major components of this program consisted of the following:
a) Program definition and design;
b) Procurement and checkout of equipment and spare parts;
c) Design and implementation of a classroom and field training plan;
d) Network installation and start-up; and
e) Network operations.
A qualified English/Spanishspeaking instructor was provided by ERT for the duration
of the program in Puerto Rico.
This program served the purpose of introducing EQB to the concept of continuous
air monitoring. Prior to this program, the EQB monitoring network consisted of manual
"wet chemistry" methods for the obtainment of ambient air quality data.
17.
KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTORS
b.lDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS C. COSATI Field/Group
Air Pollution
Atmospheric Monitoring
18. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT
Unlimited
19. SECURITY CLASS (This Report]
None
21. NO. OF PAGES
20. SECURITY CLASS (This pige)
None
22. PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (9-73)
-------